JP7263160B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of playing games.

As shown in Patent Document 1, there is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, and that displays a character image according to the set value before and after the setting change. Proposed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Fig. 12)

As for a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the entertainment of the presentation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aims to improve the attraction of the presentation related to a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a decision means capable of deciding to control to said advantageous state;
a determination means capable of determining that the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the determination means;
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display related to the variable display on the display means;
a change effect executing means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display;
The display color of the specific display varies depending on the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
There are a normal performance state and a specific performance state, which is a performance state that can be shifted from the normal performance state, in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal performance state,
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of display objects including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state,
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the specific effect state, the display color of the specific display is set to a similar color regardless of the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state. display and
displaying the display color of the specific display in a display color corresponding to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the specific display state is shifted to the normal display state;
The determination means determines transition from the normal rendering state to the specific rendering state for variable displays that have not yet started,
When the variable display that can be executed before the variable display determined by the determination means to shift from the normal effect state to the specific effect state is executed, the normal effect state is changed to the specific effect state. limited migration of
Regarding the number of colors of special information that does not suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, it is not displayed less even in the specific effect state.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of means A1 (pachinko gaming machine 1)
A setting means (game a control microcomputer 100);
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The effect control means can execute the first setting suggestion effect related to the setting suggestion in a specific display area of the display areas of the display means (the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the mini-slot 16TM030 at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, In 5C1 and 5R1, by stopping and displaying the combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] as a combination of the same symbols, it is possible to execute an effect that the role of "Bell" is established). , a second setting suggestion effect related to the setting suggestion can be executed in a predetermined display area of the display area of the display means (an effect of displaying the change number display 16TM040 in the setting suggestion mode in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed) ) and
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) executes variable display (variable display), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a different rate according to the set value. (Step S16TM2000) determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. execution ratio is different)
moreover,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example,
If the active display changes to the "red" stage (including cases where it changes during the pending display stage), the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the execution ratios of the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are different, it is possible for the player to guess the setting by combining the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect, and the interest is enhanced. can improve. Furthermore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means, when the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the first setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value Determine whether or not to execute the effect (determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), according to the set value The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion production is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to guess the set value when the variable display is performed.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means, when the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the first setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value Determine whether or not to execute the effect, and after making the determination, determine whether or not to execute the second setting suggestive effect (as shown in FIG. 9-5, the first set suggestive effect After determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect, determine whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, it is determined whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. Production control becomes possible.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A3,
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) hides the first setting suggestion effect when a specific effect (battle effect in Super Reach) is executed (Fig. 9-10 (12) As shown in , in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect ([Bell] [Bell] [Bell] in this example). is hidden)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (production control CPU 120, image display device 5) variably displays information (mini-slot design variable display) can be executed, and a special display (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") or a specific display (a winning hand is "Watermelon", "Cherry", or "7 matching ”, or a character pattern of “CHANCE”, “Fever”, or “FEVER”), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the established hand is “lost”, or “ It is characterized by being able to display a pattern of "no display").
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation executed in the specific area of the display means.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in specific areas (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the aspect of the variable display executed in the specific area becomes a special aspect (freeze aspect), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special aspect (freeze aspect) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbols perform the variable display of the freeze mode, the established hand is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 matching (freeze)", and "cherry" Since the above winning combination (“cherry” or “7 matching”) is confirmed, the degree of expectation that the mini-slot symbols will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a normal mode.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means by changing the variable display mode to a special mode.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6,
There are multiple types of specific indications ("watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are available as established roles, and "no indication", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" are available as display results). ),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of “7 matching”)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in the type of specific display.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7,
a storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (accumulated number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell" has been stopped and displayed);
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information about the display history (the history display means (image display device 5 for displaying mini-reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying winning probability of "bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information about the display history of the special display in order to guess the set value.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8,
variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) and variable display of reduced identification information (small pattern) with lower visibility than the decoration identification information;
Special variable display execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of variable display of special identification information (mini-slot symbols) different from decoration identification information and reduced identification information;
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
a display means;
The variable display means can variably display the decoration identification information in the first area (decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the center of the screen) of the display areas of the display means, and can display the reduced identification information. The variable display can be executed in the second area (small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r in the upper right part of the screen) of the display areas of the display means,
The special variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the special identification information in a third area (lower center of the screen) of the display areas of the display means,
In the first area and the third area of the display means, it is possible to display the display related to the setting suggestion, while in the second area, the display related to the setting suggestion is limited (small symbol display area 5l, 5c and 5r do not display images corresponding to setting suggestions such as mini-slot symbols)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in setting suggestions, and to appropriately perform variable display of reduced identification information in the second area.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A9,
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The display means provides a special display corresponding to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of control of the advantageous state (a winning hand is "Bell"). "Watermelon", "Cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 matching", "No display", "CHANCE", "Extreme heat", or "FEVER" symbols) can be displayed,
When the variable display period is a predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (if the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), or normal reach big hit (30 seconds), It is possible to stop display the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell"), and when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific display can be displayed after the special display is displayed. (If the variation pattern (variation time) is Super Reach Lost (120 seconds) or Super Reach Big Hit (120 seconds), after stopping the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell", the winning hand is " A combination of mini-slot symbols of "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 matching" is stopped and displayed, and symbols of "no display", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", or "FEVER" are stopped and displayed. is possible).
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display the special display with priority over the specific display, it is possible to improve interest in setting suggestion.

The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) of means B1 is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The display means provides a special display corresponding to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of control of the advantageous state (a winning hand is "Bell"). "Watermelon", "Cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols of "7 matching", symbols of "No display", "CHANCE", "Extreme heat", or "FEVER") can be displayed in a specific area. ,
Corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 where the specific display is displayed in the specific area (as shown in FIG. 9-9(8), a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Cherry" is displayed. After the stop display, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the character pattern of "hot heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1. change effect (as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), a character icon indicating the same character as the mini-slot pattern character (“hot heat”) is added to the active display 16TM030) and effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion, a change effect can be executed in response to the specific display being displayed in the specific area. can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
There are multiple types of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) as modes of the corresponding display (active display),
The game machine, wherein the effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (first change effect) for changing the special mode of the corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the display corresponding to the special mode will change.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute an effect acting on a corresponding display (active display) to be subjected to the change effect as the change effect (second change effect) (FIGS. 9-10). As shown in (11) and (12), an effect indicating that the mini-slot symbol ("Geki-netsu") stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003. After the image is displayed, a character icon showing the same character as the character ("Geki-netsu") of the mini-slot symbol displayed stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the changing presentation.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine of means B1 to means B3,
There are a plurality of types of the specific display ("missing", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 matching" are available as the establishment combination of the first variable display of the mini-slot, and " No display”, “CHANCE”, “hot”, “FEVER”),
Depending on the type of the specific display, the aspect of the corresponding display to be the target of the change effect is determined at a different rate (as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the first The winning hand for the variable display of the mini-slots of 1 is determined to be any one of "miss", "watermelon", "cherry", and "seven matching", and depending on which winning hand is determined, the second mini-slot is selected. The display result of the variable display is different from the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, and the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is different. Since it matches the form of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, it is added to the active display 16TM003 according to which hand is determined to establish the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation level announcement effect. The ratio of which character icon mode will be different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the type of specific display and the mode of corresponding display can be associated with each other, and the entertainment of the presentation can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the effect control means displays the special display at a different rate according to the set value. After making this determination, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is decided whether or not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (production control CPU 120, image display device 5) variably displays information (mini-slot design variable display), and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell") or the specific display (the winning hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that result in 7 matching”, or a character symbol of “CHANCE”, “Fever”, or “FEVER”), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols that makes the winning hand “miss”, or , “no display” pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation executed in the specific area of the display means.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in specific areas (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the aspect of the variable display executed in the specific area becomes a special aspect (freeze aspect), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special aspect (freeze aspect) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbols perform the variable display of the freeze mode, the established hand is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 matching (freeze)", and "cherry" Since the above winning combination (“cherry” or “7 matching”) is confirmed, the degree of expectation that the mini-slot symbols will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a normal mode.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means by changing the variable display mode to a special mode.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7,
There are multiple types of specific indications ("watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are available as established roles, and "no indication", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" are available as display results). ),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of “7 matching”)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in the type of specific display.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8,
a storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (accumulated number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell" has been stopped and displayed);
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information about the display history (the history display means (image display device 5 for displaying mini-reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying winning probability of "bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information about the display history of the special display in order to guess the set value.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B9,
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) that suggests a set value in a special area (bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5),
The rate at which the special display is displayed differs from the rate at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is performed by drawing lots for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times Execution lottery is performed for each change display),
The ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the gaming machine differs from the ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the gaming machine (Fig. 9-6 As shown in (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M) In addition, since the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6), the actual effect execution ratio between the first set suggestion effect and the second set suggestion effect The ratio of the setting value estimated based on the match with the setting value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested setting value to the setting value of the gaming machine differs depending on whether the special display is a special display or not. You can draw attention to what is suggested.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include inventions according to the following means (1) to (7). Conventionally, in a game machine, when the variable display of display symbols in a variable display game is completely stopped, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-2224, when the stop symbol mode becomes a specific display mode , it becomes an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player. For example, a gaming machine in a jackpot game state opens a special electric accessory called a jackpot or an attacker, and continuously provides a state in which it is extremely easy for a player to win a game ball for a certain period of time. do. In such a gaming machine, various types of effects are executed to notify the player of the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed.

As such a game machine, for example, there is a game machine that reduces the number of colors used and executes production in black and white mode.

However, since the number of colors is merely reduced, there is still room for improvement in terms of enhancing the amusement of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

(1) As a gaming machine according to another mode for achieving the above object, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The common display color is a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed in the normal effect state and the specific effect state (for example, it is displayed as "white"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Furthermore, a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9, etc.) that can emit light according to the effect being executed is provided,
The light emitting means emits light in the number of colors corresponding to the number of colors to be displayed on the display means in the specific effect state (for example, in step 074AKS056, the number of colors corresponding to the number of colors of the monochrome image is displayed). number of colors, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the game is in the specific effect state, thereby improving the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the specific effect state, the number of colors of the specific display and the background image displayed by the display means is reduced more than in the normal effect state (for example, in the processing of step 074AKS056, the monochrome effect is executed. By starting (monochrome output processing), a monochrome target image such as a suspended display, an active display, a background image, etc. is displayed in a monochrome mode, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the game is in the specific effect state, thereby improving the game interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
In the specific performance state, the performance sound output in the normal performance state can be controlled silently, and when the change performance is executed in the specific performance state, the change performance is started. (For example, during a specific production state, the output sound is muted, and for the change production, only the execution start sound is output and the success sound or failure sound is not output, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to highlight the specific effect state and to recognize the start of execution of the change effect.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When the changing effect is executed in the specific effect state, and the display color of the specific display is changed when the specific effect state is shifted to the normal effect state, the specific display is at the transition timing. Output a change notification sound that notifies that the display color of has changed (for example, for success or failure sounds, output at the timing when the monochrome effect ends),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the specific display has changed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The number of colors of the special information that does not suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is not reduced even in the specific effect state (for example, the main board 11 For images for displaying information according to commands, etc. sent from the
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the content suggested by the special information even in the specific effect state, and prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of the setting suggesting effect, and (4) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting changing flag is set when power is turned on; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted before setting values are determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted after setting values are determined. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each piece of display information displayed on the image display device; It is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect determination process that is executed at the time of start winning. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a final display mode of active display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of active display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of pending display; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process performed at the time of a fluctuation start. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute an effect, (I1) and (I2) are used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, and are used to determine whether or not to execute an expectation level notice effect. (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the second change effect. (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a winning combination determination table for the expectation level advance notice effect, which is used when the first set suggestion effect is executed, and (L) is used when the first set suggestion effect is not executed. (M) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various production|presentations. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of mini-reel information; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table according to variable display results; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of starting winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example with the production|presentation control command received by the production|presentation control board side, and the process content performed by command analysis process according to the received production|presentation control command. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an active display mode determination table; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of monochrome effect setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining whether or not to execute a monochrome effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining the end timing of monochrome effect; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of change production setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting processing such as monochrome effect; 8A and 8B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode change pattern determination table and an active display change timing determination table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation performed as suggestion production|presentation during rear variable display, and an effect|presentation pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio, an effect pattern, and an execution expectation level of an effect to be executed as a suggestive effect during front variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

In addition, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. there is The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lighting is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. In this example, the first reserved display area 5A for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second reserved display for displaying the reserved indication corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. Note that the LED 37 for hitting to the right is controlled to light up by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When game balls are detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, and is configured so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. It is In this way, by providing the nail row 19 that prevents the entry of the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area, the game ball can be shot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed hitting). operation), the game ball can win in the first start winning hole.

In addition, in this example, only when left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails, the game ball is configured to be able to win in the first start winning hole, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the first starting winning opening on the left side of the game area, or the first starting winning opening A hole may be provided on the left side of the game area and a line of nails 19 may be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting prize hole only when left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 .

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. A large winning opening positioned below the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved toward, and the opening control is executed to open the big winning opening serving as the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole are provided. 2, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged so as to be adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which game balls flow down is extended in the front-rear direction. By moving back and forth, the special winning port located below the bottom member and the second start winning port can be opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can win and a closed state (also called closed state) in which game balls cannot win. change to The special variable winning ball device 17 is a bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, and the opening control is executed to open the special prize winning opening serving as the prize winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved when the symbol is drawn out and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20, The opening control is executed to open the second start winning opening which is the winning area.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state, the ball moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B therebelow.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in an open state, the game ball falling into the second starting winning opening enters the special variable winning opening. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17 . On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. there is In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with regulation pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the motion of the forward/backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the control piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable prize ball device 6B is operated from the variable prize ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the big winning hole to get a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass through (enter) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special winning hole to obtain a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

In addition, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When game balls are detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning opening and the second start prize-winning opening may be collectively referred to as the start prize-winning opening or the start opening.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big win game or in a KT state (so-called small win time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In this pachinko game machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbols is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role of a normal starting area. However, even when a big win pattern is derived and displayed, the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the state shifts to a big win game state, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both the normal starting region and the operating region.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. .

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called left-handed operation). When a game ball enters a first starting winning hole formed in a winning ball device 6A by a player's turning operation of a hitting ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to perform a left-handed operation, a first special symbol is displayed. A first special game is started by the device 4A.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the result is a "big hit". . Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing". It should be noted that even in the first special game, the small winning symbols may be stop-displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special game becomes ``big win'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth, and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state depending on the jackpot type.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small win game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big win game state, but the state is advantageous for the player.

In the high-base state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period of fluctuating special figures) than in the normal state (time saving state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, the KT state, and the high base state continue until one of the end conditions, such as execution of the special game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state, is met first. do. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut probability variation etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variable state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability of becoming, is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on) It is in a state where

When the jackpot game ends and the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation). A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern display device 20 starts a normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol varies depending on the type of big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the big winning symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the second special game becomes ``big hit'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the second special game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed).

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the lighting of the frame LED 9 Etc./turning off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100 . The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 83) from game control microcomputer 100, and outputs solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and for large winning entrance door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further controls a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hitting notification LED 37. It supplies it to the substrate 13 and supplies an LED signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control substrate 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 based on the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, LED lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the first special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized. (more on that later). Moreover, CPU103 performs a 2nd special design process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the second special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized. be. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal which is a process for outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the game machine outside the game machine processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big win game, during the small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the start prize to the first start prize winning port, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the first pending memory number, the look-ahead determination etc. to the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12 .

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S110A to S121A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result is determined. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing for determining either one. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process is completed. do.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. During the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where the variable display of the second special symbols results in a small hit and the game is controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the second small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing unless the small winning game is in progress. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the period of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the suspension period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decoration pattern, etc., resulting in an effect that gives the player a sense of incompatibility. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the normal state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small winning control, and no particular performance is performed, so the small winning ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small winning control and an effect emphasizing the small winning control is executed, the small winning ending period may be lengthened compared to the first KT state. . In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small winning fanfare period as the small winning opening preprocessing period may be changed according to the game state, similarly to the small winning ending period.

The first special symbol stop processing of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the variation of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the confirmed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. It contains the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is ``small hit'' or ``losing'', when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the KT state, or the high base state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

The first gate passage waiting process of step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special figure process flag is "4". In this first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 . When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first big hit opening preprocessing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "5". This first big win pre-opening process includes, for example, a process of making settings for starting a round in a big win game state and opening a big winning hole based on the fact that the display result is "big win". It is included. When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The first big hit opening process in step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "6". This first jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the big winning opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. , processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7". Then, the process during the opening of the first jackpot is terminated.

The first jackpot opening post-processing of step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "7". This first jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number of times, It includes a process of making settings for terminating the game state. Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, while the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the first special The value of the figure process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the first big hit post-opening process ends.

The first jackpot end process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "8". This first jackpot end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending performance is executed as a performance operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and processing corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control, KT control, and high base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot ending process ends.

The first small hit opening preprocessing of step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "9". This first small win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for opening the special winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". . At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit opening pre-processing ends.

The process during the opening of the first small hit in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "10". The processing during the opening of the first small prize includes the processing of measuring the elapsed time from opening the special winning opening, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not it has become. The value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11" when the special winning hole is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, and the processing during the opening of the first small winning is completed.

The first small hit end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "11". The first small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small winning end processing ends.

In addition, the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Also, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in a second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the second special symbol is varied. During the display, there is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the game is controlled to a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the first small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Incidentally, regarding the small winning control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small winning fanfare period and the small winning ending period may be varied depending on the game state.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control for operating various production devices such as actions is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 8-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting switch 22A and a second starting switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various parts are connected, and various production devices such as speakers 8L, 8R and frame LEDs 9 are connected to the production control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 mainly has a function of setting random numbers used in the special game, a function of inputting signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions, and a control board on the sub side consisting of the effect control board 12 etc. , a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal, and a function of outputting various types of information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, thereby performing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. and control the variable display of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal design display device 20 to control the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display device 20 It also has control functions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays various types of prize winning information. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and detection signals from various switches for game ball detection, as well as various signals such as a power off signal, a clear signal, a reset signal, etc. 100, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016.

8-1, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided in the center of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. (for example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower central portion of the back surface of the main substrate 11 . Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entering area" The number of game balls entered into the game ball is counted, and various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. In other words, on the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board so that the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether the game balls enter the general prize winning opening at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, setting values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, can be changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches are provided. When the power supply switch 21TM055 is operated by a game hall clerk or the like in a state in which the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, predetermined of operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is performed. executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. It is possible to operate only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. It may be a possible switch.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if force is not applied by the staff of the game arcade or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game arcade clerk or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent it from getting lost.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a mechanism for discharging the game balls that have entered the respective winning openings and the game balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (ejection port) is provided, and an ejection port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball ejected from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 .

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and decorations. It contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED for use.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout such as payout control board 21TM037 and ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer containing at least a RAM. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, and an I/O port constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is implemented by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Also, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full-tank switch 21TM048 and the payout count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and a game machine frame opening sensor that can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the door frame 3a is connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the game machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light-emitting element (LED) and a light-receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect jamming of game balls, that is, so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates that the ball has run out, and that the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the tank is full. , the ball delivery process is stopped.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a low level signal to the ball launching board 21TM090 to stop the ball launching from the ball launching device. Output a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. A full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094 A signal serving to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. For confirmation, signals (prize request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prizing ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals through the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and payout control microcomputer 21TM370. , when receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (receiving ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 It is configured to exchange specific data between For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing the predetermined bits of the prize ball request signal, A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with this setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100 . In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball rental, full tank, or ball out error) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 .

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a lent ball number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal boards (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board) via the output port 21TM372b. and) output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 of the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing lighting/lighting-out is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. The input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 receives a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ready-to-use display lamp, a connecting stand direction display, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendable display signal are supplied from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. A connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is sent and received via input port 21TM372f and output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 8-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Also, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and upon detecting the trailing edge of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to deliver a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display , the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" It is designed to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is decided to make a big hit (big hit A to big hit F) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F). Provided separately, the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. good too.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends according to the specified set value. FIGS. 8-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. FIG. 8-5(1) is an example in which a “sunny” mode ending image is selected in the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 8-5(2) is an example in which a “cloudy” mode ending screen is selected in the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 8-5(3) shows an example in which an ending image of "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 8-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting values specified by the setting command.

CPU103 has transmitted the setting command which designates the setting value to CPU120 for production control. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120 when the jackpot game state is ended. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting commands in the RAM 102 . For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state is over, the image display device 5 is stored together with characters (“BONUS end” characters) for notifying that the jackpot game state is over. It is possible to display the ending image in the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

The table shown in FIG. 8-5(4) shows the cases where the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when the mode of setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), when it is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 5 (3) is assigned a determination value for determining the "rain" mode.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the production (ending production), and at a medium rate (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion production (ending production) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2), and the medium (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, the effect control CPU120, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", at a low rate (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) Determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high percentage (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by varying the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends. I would expect it to be done.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value such as 0 to 5. is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are normal values as the set values stored in the set value storage area, and six stages of set values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when shifting to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it has been decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the game state). If the value is 1, it is decided to execute RAM clear. This indicates that the In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM is not actually cleared. When the setting change mode is set, the RAM is cleared after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is non-set state). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. You can let it happen.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. The sensor 21TM300 outputs to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been detected to be open, and a detection signal that indicates that the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game controlling microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side , the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been opened to the game control microcomputer 100, and the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When shifting to the setting change mode, it is possible to confirm and change the setting value, and when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to confirm the setting value.

That is, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and there is no power interruption during the setting change ( NO at step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070). Or confirmation becomes possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (NO at step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later.

In this embodiment, in order to enter a state (setting confirmation mode) in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). On the condition that the setting value is changed, as will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. can't If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 or that there is some kind of illegality. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the setting value is going to be performed by the means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is placed in the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Control is possible, but not limited to such a form, even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode may be controlled by none of the above.

On the other hand, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), control is not performed in either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is performed. (Transmission of setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). will be controlled by mode. In addition, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4020), it is controlled to the setting change mode based on the establishment of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 to be described later). In addition, if the setting change mode has been controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled on the basis that the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 to be described later) are established. It will be.

At step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 are executed.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4120, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON at step S21TM4130 (NO at step S21TM4130), or if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON at step S21TM4140 If (NO in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 detects that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. The setting value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, it displays a message saying "the set value may be abnormal". Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn the power switch 21TM055 OFF), and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned ON). to perform an operation to change the set value (determine the set value). For example, it displays a message "After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode." It should be noted that the same notification may be made by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to indicate that the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5). Even though there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (the determination of YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) has not been satisfied and the setting change mode has not been entered." Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a call lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). be done.

During the period of the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from accumulating in the 7-segment display and causing damage to the display. Also, the security signal is continuously output during the period of the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5 ), it is possible to identify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 continues until the power supply stops (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if power failure occurs during setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before proceeding to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value in the setting value storage area cannot be fixed to the normal value because the change of the setting value is not permitted. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the loop process described above (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed.

If the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed, the normal game processing cannot be performed. not. In this manner, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not established, the power is once turned off, and the conditions (1) to (3) are all established when the power is turned on next time. Then, the setting change mode is entered, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to the normal value.

It should be noted that the CPU103, if any of the conditions of (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the predetermined By emitting light in the power-off instruction mode, the power may be urged to be turned off.

In this embodiment, if the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be checked (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (YES in step S21TM4130), the control to the setting confirmation mode is not performed even if the two conditions are satisfied. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in either setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the processing of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the regular value (one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. If the set value storage area does not store a normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, in the set value storage area as the normal value. is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure has been input. Immediately before the device becomes inoperable due to the stoppage, the power supply stoppage processing is executed. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled (repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650), the power supply If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be executed appropriately in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the values (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the game hall clerk normally recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall clerk may actually setting value may be mistakenly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area +1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 determines that the setting value has been changed. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility that the Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is set (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated setting values are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the game arcade clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is set (when the power is turned on or when the power was cut off last time) is 3. If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and transmit the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650). ) and updating of the setting value (step S21TM4620) corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (determination of YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (determination of NO in step S21TM4040 indicates that the RAM clear flag is set). remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the set value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070 or S21TM4130) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040 or S21TM4140). is determined and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing from step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

At step S21TM4680, if lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES at step S21TM4680), CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and sets the value of the security signal timer to 1000 ms (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal game process is started. will be For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the output of the security signal is started (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are started. The value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in response to the end of control in any of the modes. set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the processing for starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether control is performed in the setting change mode or in the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Also, in the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710, regardless of whether the control was performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is necessary to determine which mode was controlled). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the output control of the security signal is simplified by making the output start control and the output end control of the security signal common between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set as a security signal in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It's set on a timer. However, if the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting change mode control, which mode the external device side selects. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting change mode is set, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once set in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000 ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000 ms in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared. there is That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is temporarily set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 1 second has elapsed since the setting change mode was set, and 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode was terminated.

Specifically, if it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after interrupt permission In processing (for example, information output processing), if security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM is cleared, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal is continued until the In addition, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms ) to 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the game control timer interrupt process may be performed.

In this manner, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode and the control in the setting change mode are finished, and the control is performed in the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the control in the setting change mode was completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the output period of the security signal different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it becomes possible to grasp whether the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process was executed and the setting change mode was controlled. . For example, if the security signal output period is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the change processing was executed and the setting change mode was set.

Note that the security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area (an area cleared by initialization processing) of the RAM 102 based on the detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, since RAM clear is not executed, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output process. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for four minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period until one second elapses after the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power recovery, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs At times, it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal is output for a period of 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode (depending on the execution of RAM clearing). period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, for example, 50 ms or longer. That is, a common security signal timer value of 50 ms may be set for both when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored when the power is subsequently turned off. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the setting value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed as it is on the side of the effect control CPU 120. If they are displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set values. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU120 side, the value specified by the setting command (0 to 5) plus 1 is recognized as the set value (1 to 6), set value 1 to 6 Within the range, a production that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, not limited to such a form, CPU103 is set to the setting command the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area, effect control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command are displayed as they are on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Also, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends according to the specified set value.

Next, CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). YES at S21TM4020), and no power interruption occurred during the setting change (NO at step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4040). ), it is sufficient to execute the power-off recovery process without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and the game control timer interrupt processing (special (including pattern process processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode ends, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power failure recovery, and the normal game processing is started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the power supply was restored based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). ). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, the restoration from the power interruption was performed based on the data when the power supply was stopped. (RAM clear is not performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150 and it is decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute power-on processing accompanied by RAM clearing.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting the value of the security signal timer to 30 seconds, and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , It is sufficient to shift to the game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.) after the interrupt permission.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) is cleared, and the initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value is unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining per normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized to In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is that (a) if control is not performed in the setting change mode, the set value storage area does not contain the normal values when the power is turned on; (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is set, the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or if the value in the setting change mode is This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the top address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the table set at initialization in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for judging a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, a special symbol process flag, etc. An initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the later-described game control timer interrupt processing, big hit determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this initialization command, the initialization process is performed (RAM clearing is performed without recovery from power interruption based on the data at the time of power supply stop). recognized). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, initialization of the game state etc. (data at the time of power supply stop) It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from power failure based on .

Next, CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the security signal timer value (1 second) set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. If the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second). ), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second set in step S21TM4710. remain.

At this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the value of the security signal timer is set, so that the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process), After that, every time the timer interrupt process for game control is executed by interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. will be

Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process can be executed, and the process shifts to the normal game process. In this embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and a random number for determining whether or not to be a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit. Random number update processing is processing for updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value determines the initial value of the count value of the counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number for A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as a performance display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself). processing, or processing of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as gaming device control processing), the count value of the normal per symbol determination random number is one cycle (normal per symbol determination random number After stepping by the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum possible values, an initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a ), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) is shifted to, but in such a form However, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game hall clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to switch the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state etc. (execute RAM clearing). In addition, by turning ON the lock switch 21TM051 and turning OFF the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state, etc. is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the game hall clerk can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state and the like. there is

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the setting value to be confirmed by the game arcade is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the game stop state (step loop processing of S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, the game is started in an unstable state of the set value (game control timer interrupt processing is executed) while preventing that, when the power is turned on, the power It is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled to the setting change mode when the interruption occurred.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 determines the condition for shifting to the setting change mode ( Steps S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not established, the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor in the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) 21TM029 displays an error by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, by displaying the character "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D that constitute the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall clerk will be notified of the occurrence of an abnormality (in the setting change mode). (the possibility that a power outage may have occurred in a controlled state) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the set value abnormality error command, displays a message on the image display device 5, "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode." After turning off the power once (turning off the power switch 21TM055), when the power is turned on again (when turning on the power switch 21TM055), the clerk or the like is instructed to shift to the setting change mode and change the setting value. (fix the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130); and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140). YES), it is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. Please let me shift to the setting change mode.") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the fact that the image display device 5 was controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052) ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, it is possible to cause the image display device 5 to display a message "You are in setting change mode" or a message "Please perform a setting change operation to change the setting value". As a result, a game arcade clerk or the like can understand that the control is in the setting change mode, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed. is changed to the set value as planned, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the set value can be fixed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, one of the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions are not met, without being controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after sending the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) . As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. to switch to the setting change mode.") will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to switch to the setting change mode." It is reported that the state is not established. In this case, the store clerk or the like at the game parlor understands that the setting change mode is not controlled and the game is in the stopped state (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again after operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. In the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to the state, it is possible to fix the set value and shift the pachinko game machine 1 to the normal game processing.

In this way, when a power failure occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in the case of (a) that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored, an error is displayed on the main substrate 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029). The mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being interrupted, so that unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be properly changed.

On the other hand, in the case of (b) where the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored, it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is interrupted during the setting change mode. Therefore, the game is forcibly stopped (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is stopped. will be done. As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and transition condition (i ) to (iii) are not established, a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the setting value may be abnormal and the transition to the setting change mode has been performed (or the transition condition has been satisfied). , and the effect control CPU 120 that receives this command displays an image of the message "There is a possibility that the setting value is abnormal" and the message "It will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode." It is preferable to display it on the device 5 . On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. In response to that (turned from OFF state to ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, (2) setting changeover switch (clear switch ) 21 TM052 is operated (turned from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 .

Then, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though there is no such operation, and notify that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, the store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade clearly grasps that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, It is possible to check whether the

It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (timer interrupt process for game control) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 .

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the setting change mode was entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

As shown in FIG. 8-11, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. Alternatively, the RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the setting change mode may be entered (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the condition is satisfied.

In the processing shown in FIG. 8-11, if the result of the data check in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without judging whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. 8-6 is different from the process shown in FIG. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a configuration, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the setting change mode is entered. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. and the setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed), if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the mode to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is established, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting It will be controlled in change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determination of YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the game arcade clerk who has changed the setting value must first turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to finalize the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the setting change mode control is determined whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). are made different, while the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode. Appropriately shifting to normal game processing is made.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), it is possible to issue a notification prompting the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Execute corresponding processing), and the effect control CPU 120 that has received the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, ``Turn ON the lock switch once, and switch it to OFF after changing the set value.'' A message may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

In the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, so that the game machine 1 can be set in the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take measures to determine the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is set. This is because, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit differs depending on the set value. For example, the random number for judging a big hit extracted at the time of starting winning before changing the setting is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before change, but it is judged to be a failure in relation to the setting value after change. , Conversely, an event may occur in which a win is determined in relation to the set value before change, but is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the start winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process processing is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the reserved memory (special design reserved memory, ordinary design reserved memory) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the reserved memory number is set to the initial value (0). there is

In addition, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interruption permission of step S21TM1540 not being performed, the switch processing in the game control timer interruption processing (step S21 shown in FIG. 4) is not performed. , starting prizes, gate passage, etc. are invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like are not yet executed during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, and the random number is not updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, the random number will be the same regardless of the timing of the start winning, and the game will be played based on such a random number. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the start winning and gate passage are invalidated.

(Set value memory control when power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, setting value storage control in the case where a power failure occurs during setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 8 shows the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power supply is interrupted before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends). -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, "0" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to "0" based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed, power failure occurs. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in turn 6, the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when applying the control shown in FIG. Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the 6th and 7th turns may be the OFF state.

In this way, if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power supply is interrupted. , the setting value after change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power supply is restored, there are cases where the set values have already been set, and in this case, the game arcade clerk terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set values again. Since it is sufficient to shift the game machine to the normal game process by pressing the button, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power failure occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by changing the set value during the setting change mode, Description will be made with reference to FIG. 8-12(2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the fixed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power supply switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in sequence 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in Figures 8-12 (1) and (2), when the power supply is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set values that have been changed in accordance with the previous setting change operation in the setting change mode, that is, the set values that were stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , are valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area at the time of power restoration).

Note that the control is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is operated. 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). state to the OFF state) is performed, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to determine the setting value. can be In this case, the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting values (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is also changed according to the change of the setting value stored in the .

With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting change mode is changed. If a power failure occurs without completing the operation to terminate the change mode (without the lock switch 21TM051 being switched to the OFF state), the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 will It means that it has not been changed from the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set values stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on are still retained. Therefore, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set after the power is restored are stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time. It will be a value according to the setting value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set values when power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for gaming machines with different jackpot probabilities according to the setting values It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5 It can also be applied to a game machine in which the jackpot probability is 1/300.

In addition, the following inventions are disclosed in this characterizing portion 21TM.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting changing means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value etc. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of the control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
Specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal at step S21TM4560) for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode; ,
setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (security signal timer value) relating to the period in which the specific signal is output;
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (one second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation mode). Upon termination, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was terminated, and upon termination of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the termination of the setting change mode. do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled in the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode. Continue to output security signals until 30 seconds have passed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output for at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value in both cases when the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode are finished, and the setting change is performed. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while the setting processing by the setting means is made common. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without a specific operation (detection of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680) for ending the setting change mode. in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Equipped with a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on this,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
In the setting change mode, power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). In the specific information storage means (the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing specific information when stopped, a setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is completed. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to send an error command to the effect control means while executing error notification in the display means (send a set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190, and display monitor in the error display of step S21TM4210 21TM029 can display the letter "E"),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power and enter the setting change mode. Please allow me to migrate" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The inventions relating to the means P1 to P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a game machine that appropriately notifies the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated). A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on that,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), error notification means capable of executing error notification (game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means confirms that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting can be controlled to the setting change mode based on the changeover switch (21TM052 is ON state),
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are all executed). Based on the determination of YES, the process shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed to the setting change mode without executing the error notification. Can encourage change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the power is turned on, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140) ), the process proceeds to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
and the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit the set value abnormal error command in step S21TM4190 and display in the error display of step S21TM4210 It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to enter the setting change mode. Please let me migrate" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set values. The inventions relating to means Q1 to Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated). A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on that,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) is set), control to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON, regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the game state.
The gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the game state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). A game control microcomputer 100 that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
If the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, automatically control to the setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, when a power failure occurs during setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. is executed), and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and when being controlled in the setting change mode It is possible to end the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled in the setting change mode (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. Erasing the specific information when the setting change mode ends based on (clearing the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control ends),
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, automatically control to the setting change mode), and terminate the setting change mode based on the specific operation (end the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). let)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the conditions for ending the control in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation performed while being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610, change the set value stored in the set value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). based on the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means is configured to change the value in the setting change mode by the change operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled. (The setting value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is cleared. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
The setting change mode control means stores in the setting value storage area when a change operation is performed under control in the setting change mode and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. changing only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on a specific operation after the change operation; The setting change mode is ended (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area). to confirm it as a valid set value and end the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means stores the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled. (Even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched OFF, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is stored. is not changed, so if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled by the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 16TM will be described. 9-1 (A1) and (B1) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of pending display and active display in this embodiment. The pending display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols that have not been executed, and the active display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols that are being executed. In this embodiment, a first reserved display area 16TM011 in which a first reserved memory number (first reserved display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is displayed is provided in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. 5 is provided with an active display area 16TM013 in which an active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

Also, when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state), a mini- Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini-slot 16TM030 as if it were the base of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at the position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily understand that the mini-slot 16TM030 will execute an effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. can be done.

In this embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not variable display of special symbols is being executed (whether or not variable display of decorative symbols is being executed) and regardless of the number of pending memories. information.

When the first reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 16TM001 corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 16TM011. That is, in the first pending display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning port) is established, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and it is controlled to the jackpot game state. and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) is. When a plurality of first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011, the first reserved displays 16TM001 correspond to the first reserved displays 16TM001 in the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (in order from the right as seen from the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays an active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 indicates that after the starting condition (for example, winning the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port) is established, the starting condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game It is information corresponding to the variable display of special symbols (and the variable display of decorative symbols) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the upper center area of the image display device 5, in which the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable and stationary manner, is arranged from left to right in a pattern display area 5L, a pattern display area 5C, and a pattern display area 5C. A pattern display area 5R is assumed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the special symbol, which is a symbol smaller than the decoration symbol displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5, is variably displayed. A symbol indicating whether or not a special symbol is displayed is referred to as a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area are selected from the left in the upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the small patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are variably displayed and stopped. 5r. The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to a low probability low base state (normal state), a mini slot in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. The symbols are variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display to be described later, as shown in FIG. Mini-slot symbols of "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu" and "FEVER", which are symbols made up of suggestive notice characters, are variably displayed.

(first mini slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state), the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol, the variation of the small symbol display) is executed, mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 (areas corresponding to each of the three reels in the slot machine) are divided into three of "left", "middle" and "right". ), the first mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) can be executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one row (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. In the following description, the term "variable display" simply means variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to variable display of special symbols, or variable display of small symbols.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), in each of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels), "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", A plurality of mutually identifiable patterns such as "cherry", "7", and "blank (horizontal linear object (-) in this example)" are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols are stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, and a combination of symbols called a winning combination is completed, the winning combination is established. The winning hand may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination of different symbols. Successful hands in this embodiment are a combination of identical symbols and a combination of different symbols. In addition, in the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is "lost".

In this embodiment, the winning combination is established when the same symbols are combined. For example, when the same symbol combination of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] is arranged in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of "Bell" is established. Similarly, if the combination of the same pattern of [Watermelon], [Watermelon], and [Watermelon] is complete, the role of "Watermelon" is established, and if the combination of the same pattern of [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] is complete, " The combination of the same symbols of [7], [7], and [7] is established, and the combination of "7 matching" is established. However, when the combination of the same symbols of [Blank], [Blank], and [Blank] are arranged in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, it is handled in the same way as when the winning combination is "lost".

(Second mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first mini-slot variable display is executed (after any of the above-described winning hands are established), the mini-slot is not divided into a plurality of slots. In a single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (an area corresponding to one reel), it is possible to execute a second mini-slot variable display in which mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display). be. In the second mini-slot variable display, mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), mutually distinguishable characters such as "no display", "CHANCE", "hot heat", and "FEVER" are displayed. A plurality of types of patterns are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In this embodiment, the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed) by the displayed characters. is suggested to be a “big hit”.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the number of times of variable display executed after the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state) is counted. A change number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the change number counter is displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . The value indicated by the variable count display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variable displays executed in the normal state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), "125" is displayed as the variable count display 16TM040, and the variable display has already been executed 124 times since the game state shifted to the normal state, It shows a state in which the 125th variable display is currently being executed.

Here, the change count display 16TM040 changes from a normal mode (for example, white mode) to a setting suggestion mode different from the normal mode (for example, a white mode) by executing a second setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the setting value of the gaming machine. For example, it changes to a purple aspect).

Note that the display mode of the change number display 16TM040 may be changed from the normal mode (for example, white mode) to the normal mode and the above-described setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) based on the display result of the executed variable display. A notice effect (for example, referred to as a second expectation degree notice effect) of changing to a degree notice mode (for example, a red mode) may be executed. However, in the same variable display, both the second set suggestive effect and the second expectation level advance notice effect are not executed, and if it is decided to execute the second set suggestive effect, the second set suggestive effect in the variable display It is assumed that the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation level announcement effect.

FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing the change effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process at the time of start winning shown in FIG.

In the start winning change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first issues a set of start winning commands based on the occurrence of the start winning to the first start winning port (for example, symbol designation command, variable category command , and the first reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S16TM1000).

The design designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will be made, and whether or not the big hit is determined, among the results of determination at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win will occur and the type of the big win in the case of a big win based on the random number for judging the big win and the random number for judging the kind of the big win extracted at the time of starting winning, and designates the judgment result. Output the specified command. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be a normal reach or whether or not it will be a super reach based on the random number for determining the type of variation pattern extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. do. In addition, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores a set of commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine whether or not If a new set of starting winning commands has not been received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process ends.

If one set of start winning commands is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display by referring to the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (A)), which will be described later. (see step S16TM1010). It should be noted that the final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is the final display color of the active display determined at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, there are cases where the notice characters are displayed superimposed on the active display in response to the execution of the expectation level notice effect, which will be described later. That is, there is a possibility that the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of starting winning may change from the final display mode of the active display based on the effect determination process at the start of the variation.

FIG. 9-3A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in this embodiment, any of "normal mode (white mode)", "blue mode", and "red mode" is selected as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003. Decision values are assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the starting winning The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 70%, and the blue mode (blue display) at a rate of 25%. circular display), and at a rate of 5%, it becomes a red mode (red circular display).

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is the normal mode at a rate of 10%, the blue mode at a rate of 30%, and the red mode at a rate of 60%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change pattern and whether or not the first change effect is executed and the number of times of execution based on the active display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-3 (B)). (Step S16TM1020).

FIG. 9-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a table for determining a change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 001 to 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified judgment result is "miss"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is the change pattern 001 with a probability of 70%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 25% and the variation pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 10% for the change pattern 001, selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 002, and selected with a probability of 60% for the change pattern 003. Judgment values are assigned so that

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated. will execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a first change effect suggesting that there is a possibility of changing. This first change effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and the failure mode is changed. When the first change effect of is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed. Also, the first change effect is a effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character affects the active display, but does not change the appearance of the active display.

The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 001 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 003 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, design designation If the judgment result specified by the command is "no"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 30% change pattern 011. The pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 27%, the pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 23%, the pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 5%. A judgment value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the change pattern 011, selected with a probability of 10% for the change pattern 012, and selected with a probability of 15% for the change pattern 013. The judgment values are assigned so that the variation pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 20%, the variation pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the variation pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 013 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 015 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed after the first change effect of the success mode is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, design designation If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is that change pattern 021 is 35%. The pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 25%, the pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 20%, the pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the change pattern 021, selected with a probability of 15% for the change pattern 022, and selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 023. , and the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 25% and the variation pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 024 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 025 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pending display change pattern based on the pending display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-4 (C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and continues the process as it is. finish.

FIG. 9-4(C) is a diagram for determining the change pattern of the pending display for one pending memory when the first pending memory number stored in the first pending memory number saving area is "1". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 101 to 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command When the designated judgment result is "miss"), the change pattern 101 is 100% as the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 102 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display at the time of the active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "miss"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 103 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 9-4, the active shift means that the first suspension display 16TM001 shifts from the first suspension display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, it becomes the determination target at the time of starting winning). display of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display).

In this embodiment, the display mode is not changed when the first reserved display 16TM001 shifts from the first reserved display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013. That is, the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift matches the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 is not changed during the active shift. You can let me.

FIG. 9-4(D) is for determining the change pattern of the pending display for two pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "2". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 201 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 202 is 40%. Selection is made with a probability, and judgment values are assigned so that the variation pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is assigned a judgment value so that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%. there is

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 204 is 10%. The determination values are assigned so that the pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30% and the pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by .

FIG. 9-4(E) is for determining the change pattern of the pending display for three pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "3". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 301 to 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the designated judgment result is "miss"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 301 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 302 is 20%. The decision values are assigned so that the pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20% and the pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by .

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in red mode, (1) When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified judgment result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 305 is 13%. is selected with a probability, the variation pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%, the variation pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the variation pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the variation pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%. A judgment value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 20% for the change pattern 305, selected with a probability of 20% for the change pattern 306, and selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 307. , the variation pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 13%, the variation pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the variation pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 9-4(F) is a diagram for determining the change pattern of the pending display for four pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "4". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the designated determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 401 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 402 is 20%. The decision values are assigned so that the variation pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%, the variation pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the variation pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. . On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 402 is selected with a probability of 30%, the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 30%. , and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 406 is 3%. is selected with a probability, the variation pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%, the variation pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 3%, the variation pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the variation pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 10%. selected, the variation pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 10%, the variation pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the variation pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 15%. , the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 16%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 406 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%. , the variation pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the variation pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 7%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the variation pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the variation pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content ( Reach, pseudo-run, etc.), based on the reception of a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbols is executed, and the special symbols It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the contents of the production (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 9-5 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of variation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-6(G)) (step S16TM2000). .

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect as the effect of suggesting the currently set setting value. In this first setting suggestion effect, a combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] as a combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. By doing so, it is a production that the role of "Bell" is established. That is, based on the stop display of the combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player can set the set value. It recognizes that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting has been executed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 9-6(G), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97% and to execute it at a rate of 3%. Further, when the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 96% and to execute it at a rate of 4%. Further, when the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 95% and to execute it at a rate of 5%. Further, when the set value is "4", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 94% and to execute it at a rate of 6%. Further, when the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 93%, and to execute it at a rate of 7%. Further, when the set value is "6", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 92% and to execute it at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Become. In the present embodiment, the processing for determining the effect at the time of starting the variation is executed each time the variable display is performed, so whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is to be executed is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the above-mentioned first mini-slot variable display is [Bell] or "Loss". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed. The player is also interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to guess the set value for each variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestive effect (YES in step S16TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed when executing the first set suggestive effect. (Step S16TM2020). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120, which will be described later.

FIG. 9-6 (H1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level announcement effect when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "no". In the execution/non-execution determination table 1 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each variation pattern for loss. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds). In addition, when the variation pattern is "no normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100%. Also, if the variation pattern is "super reach lost" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 60%, and to execute it at a rate of 40%. do.

FIG. 9-6 (H2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "big hit". In the execution/non-execution determination table 1 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each of the big win variation patterns. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "normal reach big hit" (variation time is 30 seconds). Also, when the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 20%, and to execute it at a rate of 80%. do.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2), whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern (variation time). In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). second), it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 100%, and if the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds), the expectation level announcement effect is performed. It is decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute an expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 80%.

When a variation pattern with a short variation time (non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level notice effect There is not enough time to execute the production of Therefore, when a variable display based on a variation pattern with a short variable time is executed, although the first set suggestion effect can be executed, the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed after the first set suggestion effect is executed. there is

On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a long variation time (super reach loss (120 seconds), super reach big hit (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level notice effect are performed. Sufficient time is provided for execution. Therefore, it is possible to execute the expectation level announcement effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the variable time. If the variable time is short, the variable time is long. In either case, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a common rate. On the other hand, the expectation degree announcement effect is executed at a higher rate when the variable time is long than when the variable time is short. That is, when the variation time of the variable display to be executed is short, the variation time of the variable display to be executed is longer than the [ratio of execution of the expectation degree announcement effect after the first setting suggestion effect is executed]. The [percentage of the execution of the expectation degree announcement effect after the execution of the first setting suggestion effect] is higher.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation level announcement effect (YES in step S16TM2030), the display result to stop display in the above-described second mini-slot variable display and the second change Whether or not to execute an effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6(J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect is to change the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on "a character pattern as a display result stopped in the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. It is a production that makes In this embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display is a display result of "no display" in which the character pattern is not displayed. Become. On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

FIG. 9-6(J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation degree announcement effect, the character pattern is a mini-slot as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display. It is possible to determine either "no display", which is a display result not displayed in the pattern display area 5LCR1, or "CHANCE", "rapid heat", and "FEVER", which are character patterns, and each of these displays can be determined. A judgment value is assigned to each result.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), when the display result of the variable display is "loss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "loss"), the variation 70% of the time, "No Display" is selected, 25% of the time, "CHANCE" is selected, and 5% of the time, "Extreme Heat" is the display result of the second mini-slot variable display performed in the display. is selected.

On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the second mini-slot variable executed in the variable display As a display result of the display, "no display" was selected at a rate of 22%, "CHANCE" was selected at a rate of 35%, "great heat" was selected at a rate of 40%, and " FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of the big win is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), regarding the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display for 1 reel), "no display"<"CHANCE"<"hot heat"<"FEVER" Expectations for a big hit are high in this order. Therefore, when any character pattern of "CHANCE", "rapid heat", and "FEVER" is stopped (when the second change effect is executed after that), none of the character patterns are stopped and displayed. The ratio of winning big is higher than when the result is "no display" (when the second change effect is not executed after that). In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the character pattern to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In this embodiment, when the character pattern (either of "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu", and "FEVER") stops as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display, the display mode of the active display is changed. A second change effect is executed. Specifically, in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (reel 1) of the mini-slot 16TM030, when any character symbol of "CHANCE", "Gekiatsu", and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed, (i) The stopped character pattern moves upward from the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 9-10 (11)), (ii) The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon showing the same character as the character pattern that resulted in the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character pattern resulting from the display is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a successful combination of the expectation degree previous notice effect, which is used when executing the first set suggestion effect, in the expectation degree previous notice effect establishment combination determination table 1 (see FIG. 9-7 (K)). (step S16TM2050) and proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7(K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the established combination determination table 1 of the expectation level advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect, more specifically, the expectation level As a winning combination (hereinafter the same) of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the notice effect, "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", Any one of "cherry (freeze)", "7 matching", and "7 matching (freeze)" can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each winning combination.

In the present embodiment, when "lost" is selected as the establishment combination of the expectation level notice performance, mini-slot symbols of combinations including different symbols are stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5R1, the expectation level notice effect is established. It becomes a "misalignment".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 matching" are selected as the roles for which the expectation level notice effect is to be established, mini-games with the same symbols are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. The slot pattern is stopped and displayed. For example, when a combination of mini-slot symbols [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] are stopped and displayed as combinations of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the expectation level notice effect is realized. becomes "watermelon".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" and "cherry (via replay)" are selected as the establishment role of the expectation level notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 are displayed with the same symbols. After the combination of mini-slot symbols [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] is stopped and displayed, the mini-slot symbols are changed again in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 to display the mini-slot symbols. A combination of mini-slot symbols of [Watermelon], [Watermelon], [Watermelon], or a combination of mini-slot symbols of [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] as a combination of the same symbols in areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. stop display.

In the present embodiment, when "Cherry (Freeze)" and "7 Matching (Freeze)" are selected as establishment roles of the expectation level notice effect, the normal mode ( After executing the variable display of the mini-slot symbols in a freeze mode different from the scroll display and update display from the top to the bottom), [Cherry], [Cherry], [Cherry] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 ] or the combination of mini-slot symbols [7], [7], [7] are stopped and displayed. The variable display of the freeze mode in this embodiment means that the mini-slot pattern display that scrolls upward from the bottom or updates the display while the visibility of the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is lowered. Variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed) case), the successful combination in the expectation level announcement effect is “lost” at a rate of 100%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " CHANCE"), the winning role in the expectation level notice effect is "lost" at a rate of 5%, "suica" at a rate of 45%, and "suica (via replay)" at a rate of 20%. , 20% of the time it will be "cherry", 2% of the time it will be "cherry (via replay)", and 8% of the time it will be "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "hot heat" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is In the case of "Extreme heat"), the success role in the expectation level notice effect is "Watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "Watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%, and " 10% of the time it will be "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 25% of the time it will be "Cherry (Freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " FEVER"), the successful combination in the expectation level announcement effect is "7 matching" at a rate of 70% and "7 matching (freeze)" at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the winning hand is "lost", the stop symbol is "no display" or "CHANCE", and when the winning hand is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stop symbol ( The character icon) becomes "CHANCE" or "rapid heat", and when the winning combination is "7 matching", the stop symbol (character icon) becomes "FEVER". Further, when the winning hand is "lost", the stop symbol "no display" is more likely to be selected than "CHANCE", and when the winning hand is "watermelon", the stop symbol (character icon) is "hot heat". ``CHANCE'' is more likely to be selected than ``CHANCE'', and when the winning combination is ``Cherry'', ``Super heat'' is more likely to be selected than ``CHANCE'' as the stop symbol (character icon).

That is, regarding the second mini-slot variable display stop symbol, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state increases in the order of "no display"<"CHANCE"<"extreme heat"<"FEVER". With respect to the established combination of variable mini-slot display, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is high in the order of "lost"<"watermelon"<"cherry"<"seven match". In addition, when "7 matching" is selected as the winning combination of the first variable display of the mini-slot, the stop symbol of the second variable display of the mini-slot is always "FEVER", so "7 matching" is a big hit. It is a production of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state according to the established combination composed of a plurality of kinds of mini-slot symbols, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), the successful combination accompanied by the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "7 matching (freeze)". Then, when "Cherry (Freeze)" is selected as the winning hand, the display result (character icon) becomes "CHANCE" or "Gekiatsu", and when "7 Matching (Freeze)" is selected as the winning hand. , the notice character (character icon) is "FEVER". That is, when the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed in the frozen mode, the established combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "7 matching") is determined, so the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed in the normal mode. The degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when performing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first set suggestive effect (NO in step S16TM2010), it selects whether or not to execute the expectation level advance notice effect if the first set suggestive effect is not executed. (Step S16TM2120).

FIG. 9-6 (I1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level announcement effect when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "no". In the execution/non-execution determination table 2 of the degree of expectation advance notice effect, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the degree of expectation notice effect is assigned to each variation pattern for loss. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds). Also, if the variation pattern is "normal reach out" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 80% and to execute it at a rate of 20%. . In addition, when the variation pattern is "super reach lost" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 40%, and to execute it at a rate of 60%. do.

FIG. 9-6 (I2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level announcement effect when it is decided not to execute the first set suggestion effect and the display result is "big win". In the execution/non-execution determination table 2 of the expectation level announcement performance, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement performance is executed is assigned to each of the big win variation patterns. The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation level announcement performance at a rate of 30% and executes it at a rate of 70% when the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds). to decide. In addition, when the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 10%, and to execute it at a rate of 90%. do.

Here, in the example of FIGS. 9(H1) and (H2) where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, when the variation pattern of "normal reach" is selected, it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect. 9 (I1) and (I2) in which it was decided (“no execution” is 100%), but it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the “normal reach” variation pattern was selected. In this case, there is a possibility of deciding to execute the expectation level announcement effect ("executed" is 20% for "normal reach lost" and 70% for "normal reach big hit").

Also, in the example of FIGS. 9 (H1) and (H2) where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation level announcement effect when the "super reach" variation pattern is selected (" 40% in "super reach out", 80% in "super reach big hit"), in the example of FIG. When the variation pattern is selected, the ratio of execution of the expectation degree announcement effect is higher (60% for "super reach lost" and 90% for "super reach big hit"). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation degree announcement effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. .

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation degree announcement effect (YES in step S16TM2130), the display result to stop display in the above-described second mini-slot variable display and the second change Whether or not to execute an effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6(J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the establishment combination of the expectation level advance notice effect, which is used when the first set suggestion effect is not executed. (step S16TM2150) and proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7(L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the established combination determination table 2 of the expectation level advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect, more specifically, the expectation level As a winning combination (hereinafter the same) of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the notice effect, "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", Any one of "cherry (freeze)", "7 matching", and "7 matching (freeze)" can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed) case), the successful combination in the expectation degree announcement effect is “lost” at a rate of 100%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is " CHANCE"), the winning role in the expectation level notice effect is "lost" at a rate of 5%, "suica" at a rate of 15%, and "suica (via replay)" at a rate of 50%. , 2% of the time it will be "cherry", 18% of the time it will be "cherry (via replay)", and 10% of the time it will be "cherry (freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "hot heat" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is 10% of the time, 15% of the time, “Watermelon (via replay)”, and 10% of the time, “Watermelon”. 38% of the time it is "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 27% of the time it is "Cherry (Freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " FEVER"), the successful combination in the expectation level announcement effect is "7 matching" at a rate of 30% and "7 matching (Freeze)" at a rate of 70%.

Note that in the present embodiment, the first mini-slot in the expectation level notice effect is determined depending on whether it is determined to execute the first set suggestion effect or when it is determined not to execute the first set suggestion effect. An example has been shown in which the winning combination of the variable display (that is, the winning combination other than "Bell") is determined based on different tables, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation degree announcement rendering (that is, the winning combination other than "Bell") is common between the case where it is determined and the case where it is determined not to execute the first set suggestion effect. may be determined based on a table of That is, while determining whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at different ratios in steps S16TM2020 and S16TM2120 (based on the execution/non-execution determination table for different expectation level announcement effects), the common winning combination is determined in steps S16TM2050 and S16TM2150. Based on the determination table, it is also possible to determine the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation degree announcement effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state (normal state), each time the variation display is executed, the first The mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and the established hand becomes "Bell" or "Loss". Then, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) is completed, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed during the variable display (expectation degree announcement effect is executed case) and (ii) a case where the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (a case where the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation degree announcement effect is executed), the winning hand determined based on the winning hand determination table is established. After that, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is performed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a symbol that does not contain characters (“no display”) or (b) a character symbol (“CHANCE”, “hot heat”) , “FEVER”) stops. (b) When the character patterns (“CHANCE”, “Gekiatsu”, “FEVER”) are stopped, a second change effect is executed in which a character icon based on the character pattern is added to the active display. Become.

Thus, in the above-described embodiment, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) a symbol not containing characters (“no display”) stops, that is, the second Even if the change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before the change effect, and the effect configuration is adopted so that the established hand always becomes "lost". . Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the pattern that does not contain characters ("no display") stops (when the second change effect is not executed) In addition, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that may have the possibility of establishing a winning hand other than "lost".

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) symbols that do not contain characters (“no display”) stop (when the second variation effect is not executed), (i) The first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (in the 3-reel system), the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in the 1-reel system) is displayed. A second minislot variable display (first time) may be performed.

Also, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), the (b) character symbols (“CHANCE”, “Gekiatsu”, “FEVER”) may always stop. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1, the second variation effect may be executed without fail. When such an effect structure is adopted, (i) the first variable display of mini-slots (second time) executed before the second variable display of mini-slots (second time) is "lost". You can make it so that it does not.

Next, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is 25×n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 executes a second setting suggestion effect described later. Whether or not is determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the second setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-7(M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is not 25×n (where n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state, it is possible to execute the second setting suggestion effect as the effect of suggesting the currently set setting value. In this second setting suggestion effect, the variation count display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in purple at the timing when the variable display of the special symbols is started. It is a production that changes the mode. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the second setting suggestion effect is started, the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the change count display 16TM040 displayed in the purple mode in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the normal mode. back to

In FIG. 9-7 (M), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90% and decides to execute it at a rate of 10%. Further, when the set value is "2", it is determined not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88% and to execute it at a rate of 12%. Further, when the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and to execute it at a rate of 14%. Further, when the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84% and to execute it at a rate of 16%. Further, when the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and to execute it at a rate of 18%. Further, when the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute it at a rate of 20%.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state, the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, and the expectation level notice effect are executed. Although an example is shown, it is not limited to such a form, and when the game state is either a low probability high base state, a high probability high base state, or a high probability low base state, the mini on the image display device 5 The slot 16TM030 may be displayed to execute any one of the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, or the degree of expectation announcement effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state, the image display device 5 displays the change number display 16TM040 to execute the second setting suggestion effect. Regardless of the form, when the gaming state is any of the low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, or high-probability-low base state, the image display device 5 displays the number of fluctuations 16TM040, and the second A setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, it is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120 whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect, and further in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. We have decided the establishment role of the expectation level notice production. When determining the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. , in this embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time).

In addition, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation degree announcement effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect. When the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), and normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is determined at a rate of 100% that "expectation degree notice effect is not executed". On the other hand, when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), it is determined that "execute the expectation level announcement effect" at a rate of 40%, and in the case of super reach jackpot (120 seconds) decides to "execute the expectation level announcement effect" at a rate of 80%.

Thus, regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the first setting suggestion effect can be executed, and regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 , [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] mini-slot symbols can be stopped and displayed. Further, when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestive effect and the expectation level notice effect can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 can be executed. , and 5R1 stop displaying combinations of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell]. Combinations of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.) can be stopped and displayed. According to such a configuration, in the mini-slot 16TM030, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, and it is possible to execute the expectation level notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the display result will be a "big hit". As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), every time the first setting suggestion effect with different execution ratios according to the setting value is executed, the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is counted by the player himself/herself. , the player himself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect [execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect = (the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect / the number of times of fluctuation) x 100], and the calculated first setting suggestion The player can guess the set value by determining which set value of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the execution ratio of the effect approximates.

Hypothetically, a configuration is adopted in which the determination of whether or not to execute the anticipation performance is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the first setting suggestion performance is to be performed, and the expectation level prediction performance is performed with priority over the first setting suggestion performance. In this case, the execution lottery for the first set suggestion effect is not performed due to the fact that the expectation level notice effect is decided to be executed and the variable time, or the lottery for the first set suggestion effect is won. However, there may be a case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed due to the expectation level advance notice effect being given priority. As a result, the degree of divergence between the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual setting value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for guessing the setting value is lowered, and there is a possibility that the player will not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in steps S16TM2000 and S16TM2020 in FIG. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed over the expectation degree announcement effect.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, FIG. 9-8 to FIG. 9 with regard to specific examples when it is decided to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree announcement effect. -10 is used for explanation. FIG. 9-8 is a time chart when executing the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level announcement effect, and FIG. 9-9 and FIG. -10 shows an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level notice effect are executed. It is an explanatory diagram.

9-8 to 9-10, when the CPU 103 performs the first start winning determination process (S101A), the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting win becomes "big hit". This is an example when it is determined (when designated by a design designation command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to be red in step S16TM1010 in the change effect determination process at the time of start winning, and changes the active display in step S16TM1020. This is an example of a case where the pattern is determined to be the variation pattern 022 and the execution of the first variation effect of the success mode is determined.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the variation display is a "big hit" at the start of variation (designated by a display result designation command), and sets the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display to "super reach jackpot". (120 seconds)" (specified by the variation pattern command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first setting suggesting effect in step S16TM2000 in the effect determination process at the time of start of variation, and executes the expectation degree announcement effect in step S16TM2020. In step S16TM2040, it is decided to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be "super heat", and in step S16TM2050, it is decided to execute the second change effect, and in step S16TM2050, the degree of expectation notice effect is decided. This is an example in the case where it is decided to set the established hand to be "Cherry (Freeze)" and to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state, the display of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) Based on the fact that the result is "lost", the effect control CPU 120 determines when the variable display is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns ("247" in this example) is continuously displayed. Also, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing", the small symbol display area 5l of the image display device 5 and the small symbol display area 5c and the small pattern display area 5r, the combination of small patterns ("247" in this example) when the variable display is stopped is continuously displayed. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 to display four first reserved displays 16TM001 in response to the fact that the number of first reserved memories is four.

When in the low probability low base state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), in the image display device 5, the number of times the variable display is performed during the period of the low probability low base state (normal state) 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, after moving to the low probability low base state, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 124 times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), "124" etc. is displayed in a normal mode (white mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the mini- In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([Replay], [Replay], [Bell] in this example) when the variable display is fixed and stopped is continuously displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, corresponding to the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3. Then, three first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Based on the decision to execute the second setting suggestion effect in S16TM2070, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, after moving to the low probability low base state, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), "125" etc. is displayed in purple. The player understands that the setting has been suggested by the fact that the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 has changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8), the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000. The symbol variable display (first mini-slot variable display) is started. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8), the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the change count display 16TM040 (characters such as "125") displayed in purple mode is returned to normal mode (white mode). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is continued, and in the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the image display device 5, the mini-slot patterns are variable. continue to display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8 timing of T4), in step S16TM1020 it is determined that the change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 022, and based on the fact that it is decided to execute the first change effect of the success mode, success The first change effect of the aspect is executed. In this example, a character 16TM050 appears and an effect is executed in which a ball is thrown toward the active display 16TM003. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 hits the active display 16TM003, the player can expect that the mode of the active display 16TM003 will change.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. , Continues variable display of mini-slot symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8 timing of T5), according to the execution of the first change effect of the success mode, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, the white round display to the red round display). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Bell][ Bell] [Bell]) is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8 timing of T6), based on the fact that it has been decided in step S16TM2050 that the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect is to be "cherry (freeze)", the expectation level announcement effect is executed, and the image display device In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of 5, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols in the freeze state is started. In this example, when the freeze-mode variable display is executed, a darkened image 16TM100 is displayed as a cover image covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbols. In the difficult state, variable display (scroll display or update display) of mini-slot symbols from bottom to top is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In this embodiment, by displaying the darkened image 16TM100 covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 in order to reduce the visibility of the mini-slot symbols, the mini-slot image 16TM100 having a lower display priority than the darkened image 16TM100 is displayed. Although the slot pattern is difficult to see, it is slightly visible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%). A mini-slot symbol with a low display priority (an image whose display layer is lower and which can be seen behind the darkened image 16TM100 from the viewpoint of the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is 0). %).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8), the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 is determined based on the fact that it is decided in step S16TM2050 that the establishment hand of the expectation degree announcement effect is to be "cherry (freeze)". , 5C1 and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) when the winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 puts "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the ready-to-reach state should be established in the variation pattern. is displayed in a stationary state, and characters "READY!!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display with the establishment of the ready-to-win state as a trigger. . That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the three-reel mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 to the one-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. In the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of one reel, any of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols (“no display”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, “FEVER”) can be displayed as a display result. When the result is a pattern ("CHANCE", "Geki-netsu", "FEVER") including the notice character, the icon of the notice character resulting in the display result is added to the active display based on the display result. A second change effect is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of mini-slot symbols in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the effect control CPU 120 decides in step S16TM2040 to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be "rapid heat", that is, Based on the fact that the notice character of the expectation degree notice performance is determined to be "rapid heat", the symbol including the notice character of "rapid heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (timing of T9 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (11), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2040 to execute the second change effect (stop display of the symbol including the notice character). Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing of T10 in FIG. 9-8). In this example, when the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the "hot" symbol) stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is displayed from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. It moves to the active display area 16TM013, and an effect acting on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the "hot heat" symbol) popped out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the effect image is displayed. It suggests to the player that the aspect of the active display 16TM003 will change. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (12), a battle effect is executed according to the variation pattern of super reach. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes a character icon (in this example, a character icon of "rapid heat") based on the mini-slot symbol displayed stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 on the active display 16TM003. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. That is, a character icon indicating the same character as the notice character ("rapid heat" in this example) resulting from the display is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 Then, a combination of mini-slot symbols ([Cherry] [Cherry] [Cherry] in this example) in which the winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed (Fig. 9-9 (8)), and then the mini-slot symbols are displayed. In the area 5LCR1, the mini-slot symbol (“Geki-netsu” in this example) as the notice character of the expectation degree notice effect is stop-displayed (FIG. 9-10 (10)), and then stopped in the mini-slot-symbol display area 5LCR1. A second change effect is executed in which a character icon indicating the same characters as the characters of the displayed mini-slot symbol (in this example, "hot heat") is added to the active display 16TM003 ((11) and (12) in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12) )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed according to the combination of the mini-slot symbols stop-displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the 2-change effect can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, the first setting suggestion effect is ended before the battle effect executed according to the variation pattern of super reach is started. I'm trying That is, before the battle effect is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [bell][ Bell] [Bell]) is hidden. Thus, by executing the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value in the first half of the variable display (before the ready-to-reach state is established), that is, before the display result of the variable display is suggested, the first setting is performed. It is possible to increase interest in suggestive production. In addition, in the second half of the variable display (after the ready-to-win state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the variable display is indicated (after the battle effect that informs whether the display result will be a "big hit" is started) In this case, since the first setting suggestion effect has already ended, it is possible to draw attention to the display result of the variable display (the result of the battle effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect, the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) in which the established hand is "lost", stops. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), based on the fact that it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 are established. A combination of mini-slot symbols ([Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] in this example) with the winning combination of "Bell" is stopped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the mini-slot symbol display on the image display device 5 is based on the fact that it is decided to execute the expectation degree announcement effect and that the established hand is decided to be "Cherry". In areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) in which the winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped. In this way, any one of a plurality of types of winning hands can be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot 16TM030. Interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) and (3), in the lower left area of the screen of the image display device 5 different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5), the number of fluctuations is displayed. A second setting suggestion effect is executed to change 16TM040 from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is in the range of 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6). As shown in 9-7 (M), the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is in the range of 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6), so both effects are executed the same number of times. If it is assumed that the second setting suggestion effect is performed, it is easier to guess the set value than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6). Then, the set value corresponding to the effect execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the gaming machine. In addition, by comparing the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect and the predetermined effect execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6), the former A set value corresponding to the closest effect execution ratio is guessed as a set value of the game machine. When such an estimation is made, the setting value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is higher than the setting value estimated based on the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. There is a high possibility that it is the setting value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery for the first setting suggestion effect is performed for each variation display, and the execution lottery for the second setting suggestion effect is performed for each 25 times of variation display. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times within the same fluctuation display count (within the same time) than the second setting suggestion effect, which is useful for estimating the set value. . In this way, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the setting value suggested by the effect is the setting value of the gaming machine at different rates, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, small pattern variable display is executed. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9, in the special effect area 16TM035 (bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5), the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and in the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first 2 Setting suggestion production is executed. In this way, in the upper part of the screen, the variable display of the small symbols is executed as an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, while in the lower part of the screen, the setting suggestion effect (the first setting suggestion effect, the second By executing the setting suggesting effect), one of the effects does not reduce the visibility of the other effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3(A), as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, there are a plurality of display modes such as a normal mode, a blue mode, and a red mode ( display color). Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), when the character 16TM050 appears and the effect effect of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed, the display mode (display) of the active display 16TM003 color) is changed from a normal mode (white circular display) to a red mode (red circular display). In addition, the second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of variation, and based on the character symbol that is the display result, the icon of the character indicated by the character symbol is displayed. A second change effect added to the active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect that changes the display color of the active display according to the action effect executed in a region different from the region where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the region where the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( By providing a plurality of types of change effects, called a second change effect, in which the display shape of the active display is changed according to the effect effect based on the notice character displayed in the special effect area 16TM035), the interest in changing the active display is enhanced. can be further improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), when the second change effect is executed, the mini-slot symbols stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 ("hot heat" in this example). , jumps out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and hits the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013. Specifically, after an effect image showing that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, “hot”) jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the mini-slot symbol display area is displayed. A character icon showing the same character as the character of the mini-slot symbol stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 are associated with each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the winning combination of the expectation degree announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is "miss", "suika , "cherry", and "7 matching". Then, according to the determined winning hand, the selection ratio of which display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", "CHANCE", "great heat", or "FEVER". different. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is one of the character symbols "CHANCE", "Gekiatsu", and "FEVER", the mode of the character symbol, It matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. In other words, it is determined in which mode the character icon added to the active display 16TM003 will be in accordance with the winning combination of the expectation level announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. the proportions are different. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 are associated with each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of tally result of winning hand)
In this embodiment, during the demo display, the "volume adjustment" icon for adjusting the volume during the game, the "light amount adjustment" icon for adjusting the light amount during the game, the low probability low base state (normal state ) and the number of wins of each winning combination in the mini-slot 16TM030, a menu screen including a "mini reel information" icon, etc. is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, it is possible to select each icon of "volume control", "light amount control", and "mini reel information".

FIGS. 9-11 are displayed on the full screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of mini-reel information;

As shown in FIGS. 9-11, the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the text "mini-reel information". In addition, in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, the total number of variable display (variable display of special symbols) executed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) and the winning number of each winning combination in the mini-slot 16TM030 are displayed. , a selected tab 16TM210 displaying the characters "today", and a next selection tab 16TM220 displaying the characters "previous day" are displayed. Further, on the right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210 to prompt the user to operate the stick controller 31A. Further, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters "return".

In the mini reel information 16TM200, at the top, the character "number of rotations" is displayed as an item indicating the number of times of variable display, and correspondingly, the cumulative total of variable displays executed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) The number of times "XXXX times" is displayed. In the second row, the character "Bell" is displayed as an item indicating the bell of the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times "Bell" has been achieved as the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display is displayed as "AAAA". times”, and the probability of winning “Bell” “(1/aaaa.a)” [= Cumulative number of times “Bell” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the third row, characters "watermelon" are displayed as an item indicating watermelon as the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times "watermelon" has been achieved as the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display is displayed as "BBBB." times”, and the probability of winning “(1/bbbb.b)” of “Watermelon” [= Cumulative number of times “Watermelon” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability low base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the fourth row, the word "cherry" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination "cherry". times”, and the winning probability of “Cherry” “(1/cccc.c)” [= Cumulative number of times “Cherry” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the fifth row, the character "777" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination of 7 matches. “DDDD times” and “7 matching” winning probability “(1/dddd.d)” [= Total number of times “7 matching” was established / Variable display executed in low probability low base state (normal state) Total count] is displayed.

In addition, the total number of times (DDDD times) that "7 matching" has been won is the combination of mini-slot symbols that become "7 matching" in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of mini-slot 16TM030 (in this example, .

Also, each total number of times (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed with a maximum of four digits, and the count stops at "9999 times". Also, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed with a maximum of 5 digits including the first decimal place, and the count stops at "1/9999.9". For each winning combination, if the number of wins is one or more, the probability of winning is displayed, and if the number of wins is 0, the probability of winning is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 stores history information (such as the above-described total number of times) related to the mini-reel information, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the mini-reel information as an image based on the stored history information. It can be displayed on the display device 5 . Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before last" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even when the power is turned off.

The mini-reel information is defaulted to the mini-reel information of "today", characters of "today" are displayed on the selected tab 16TM210, and characters of "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the user to operate the stick controller 31A. Each time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "the day before" to "the day before", and the selected tab 16TM210 is displayed. The text is switched from "the day before" to "the day before", and the text of the next selection tab 16TM220 is switched from "the day before" to "today". When the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A is operated while the mini-reel information of "two days ago" is selected, the mini-reel information of "today" is selected again, and the characters of the selected tab 16TM210 are displayed. is changed to "today", and the characters of the next selection tab 16TM220 are changed to "the previous day".

When the gaming machine is powered on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to, and if the date of the previous power-on is different from the date of the current power-on, the history information of "previous day" is changed to " After storing (overwriting history information) in the storage area corresponding to "two days ago", store the history information of "today" in the storage area corresponding to "the day before" (overwriting history information) and update the data . As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business on "today", based on the updated history information of "the day before" and "the day before" stored in the backup storage area, "the day before" and "the day before" Everyday” mini reel information can be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters "Return". When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM280 is being displayed, the display of the mini-reel information ends and the menu screen returns.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, the backed up "today", " The image display device 5 displays the mini-reel information based on the history information of "the day before" and "the day before the day before". Then, in the mini-reel information 16TM200, it is the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, and is the winning probability of "Bell" "(1/aaaa.a)" [= Cumulative number of times "Bell" has been established / low probability low base Cumulative number of variable display executed in the state (normal state)] is displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the player counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the player himself/herself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect, and the calculated first setting suggestion effect is calculated. The setting value can be estimated by determining which setting value of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each known setting value the execution ratio approximates. However, when the player himself counts the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect, the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect may be erroneously counted. In this embodiment, during the demo display, the player can confirm the execution probability of the first setting suggestive effect (the winning probability of "Bell") in the mini-reel information by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Since it is possible, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestive effect is erroneously counted, the correct execution probability of the first set suggestive effect can be easily grasped.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect were effects suggesting the currently set setting value, but the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect , It can be said that it is a production that suggests that the setting has been changed. For example, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is close to the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is close to the setting value. 2, it is difficult for the player to estimate the actual set value when the execution rate (well-known execution rate) of the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to 2 is approximate. However, in such a situation, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the mini-reel information of “the day before” and “the day before the day before” are both the execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the set value 1 (well-known execution ratio), the player can at least guess that there is a high possibility that the set value has been changed. In other words, it can be inferred that the set value of "the day before" and "the day before last" is set to 1, and since there is a high possibility that the set value of "today" has been changed, the current set value is at least a set value of 2 or more.

Note that the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects that are executed at different rates depending on whether or not the setting value is changed on the day. For example, if the set value is changed on the day, the setting suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the set value is not changed on the day.

Also, the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects that are executed at different rates according to the set value. For example, an effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Also, the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects in which the effect mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while when the set value is 3 or more. Alternatively, the display color of the setting suggestion effect may be determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of "lost" < "watermelon" < "cherry" < "7 matching". Although an example has been shown, it is not limited to such a form, and the degree of expectation for a specific jackpot type may be varied according to the established hand. For example, the degree of expectation that the type of jackpot will be a variable probability jackpot differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation may be increased in the order of "lost"<"watermelon"<"cherry"<"7 sets".

(3) In the above-described embodiment, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "lost" is executed. However, not limited to this, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "lost" is executed. (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself may not be performed.

When such an effect configuration is adopted, (ii) when the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (a) When it is decided to execute the expectation level announcement effect, the first mini-slot variable display related to the expectation level announcement effect is executed, and the establishment role other than "bell" (including "failure") is selected as the establishment role. After establishment, the second mini-slot variable display relating to the expectation level advance notice effect is executed. On the other hand, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (ii) if the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed, (b) it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect. Sometimes, neither the first mini-slot variable display nor the second mini-slot variable display will be performed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. An example has been shown in which the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5, but the mini-reel information may be displayed during a period other than the demonstration display. For example, during the period of the jackpot game state including the fanfare period and the ending period, or during the period of the variable display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect. In addition, the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified without requiring an operation. The execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed when the period ends.

(5) In the above embodiment, the example in which the mini-reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 is shown. Also good. For example, in a gaming machine equipped with a sub-image display device that displays various effect images different from the image display device 5, mini-reel information is displayed on the sub-image display device during demo display, during a jackpot game state, or during variable display. You can

(6) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the second change effect is the effect of changing the display mode of the active display. It may be an effect that changes the display mode. For example, according to the display result (character pattern) of the second mini-slot variable display, a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the non-executed variable display (the target variable display of the pre-reading notice) is executed. A second change effect may be executed in which a character icon based on the display result of the mini-slot variable display is added to the pending display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. Thus, the display result suggested by the second mini-slot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display that is being executed, and may be the display result of the variable display that is not being executed. Further, the target of the corresponding information to be changed by the second change effect is not limited to the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display being executed (active display), but also the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display not being executed (holding display). may be

(7) In the above embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels) is performed twice (the first winning combination is "Bell" or "Loss"). , and the second winning hand is other than "Bell"), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mini-slot variable display may be performed three times or more. For example, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display is executed twice, and the expectation level based on the decision to execute the expectation level announcement effect The first mini-slot variable display relating to the advance notice effect may be performed twice, and then the second mini-slot variable display relating to the degree of expectation notice effect may be executed. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed a total of four times, after the first winning hand is set to "miss", the second winning hand is set to "Bell" (first setting suggestion effect), and the third time is performed. It is possible to set the winning hand of the fourth time to be "cherry" after the winning hand of the fourth time is set to "watermelon".

(8) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the second mini-slot variable display is executed only once based on the decision to execute the expectation degree announcement effect. 2 minislot variable display may be performed more than once. For example, after the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is "CHANCE", the display result of the second mini-slot variable display may be "rapid heat". In this way, when the second mini-slot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that a display result with a high degree of expectation is not followed by a display result with a low degree of expectation, The ebb and flow of notice characters shall be restricted.

In addition, the second change effect may be executed multiple times in response to the execution of the second mini-slot variable display multiple times. For example, based on the display result of the first variable mini-slot display being "CHANCE", the character icon of "CHANCE" is displayed superimposed on the active display, and then the display result of the second variable mini-slot display. becomes "extreme heat", the character icon "extreme heat" may be superimposed on the active display instead of the character icon "CHANCE". In this way, when the second change effect is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so as not to change from a display mode with high expectations to a display mode with low expectations, and active display is performed. It shall limit the downfall of the display mode.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode was exemplified as the special mode of variable display of the mini-slot symbols, but the invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of special modes may be provided. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the above-described freeze mode, a mode in which the speed at which mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (the speed of scrolling) is extremely faster or slower than in the normal mode may be provided. A mode may be provided in which the mini-slot symbols to be played are enlarged (for example, 200% of the normal mode). Furthermore, the ratio of winning hands may differ according to the type of special mode. For example, in the second special mode (freeze mode) than in the first special mode (mode in which the mini-slot symbols are enlarged), the winning hand for the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is "cherry" or "7 matching". You may make it the ratio which becomes high.

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display times) of mini-slot symbols may be provided. For example, as variable display patterns of mini-slot symbols, a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbols, the winning hand may be determined at different ratios. For example, in the case of a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of winning wins "Cherry" or "7 matching" is higher than in the case of a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 3.5 seconds. may be higher.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, at the timing when the combination of mini-slot symbols is stop-displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (when the winning hand is established), the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a manner corresponding to the winning hand. Effect images may be displayed in the display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. For example, when "Replay" is established as a successful role, a blue effect image is displayed, and when "Bell" is established as a successful role, a yellow effect image is displayed, and "Watermelon" is established as a successful role. , a green effect image is displayed, and if "cherry" is established as a winning hand, a red effect image is displayed, and if "7 matching" is established as a winning hand, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed. good.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 stop and display "7 Matches" as a winning combination to notify that the big win is confirmed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , "BAR COMPLETE" may be stop-displayed as a winning combination to notify that the big win is confirmed. Stopping display of "ALL BAR" as a winning hand means stopping display of the combination of [BAR][BAR][BAR] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. Further, it may be configured such that when "7 matching" is established, the probability variable big win is decided, and when "BAR matching" is established, the normal big win is decided.

(13) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbols does not depend on whether or not the variable display of the special symbols is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed), and Although an example of information that can be displayed regardless of the number of reserved memories has been shown, the mini-slot 16TM030 may be hidden during a predetermined period without being limited to such a form. For example, the mini-slot 16TM030 may be hidden during the period in which the super reach effect is being executed.

(14) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is not established multiple times during one time of variable display of special symbols, except for "lost". It is not limited to such a form, and during one time of variable display of the special symbol, the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) other than "lost" may be established a plurality of times. In the case of adopting such a configuration, if the total number of times that a winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established is included in the total number of It becomes extremely difficult to grasp the most important information in estimating the set value, such as whether the winning hand [Bell] was established corresponding to It may decrease and the player may not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, even if the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established a plurality of times during the variable display of one special symbol, the same winning combination is displayed during this variable display. The cumulative number of times is counted, with the number of times that the condition is established as 1 time. For example, even if the winning combination of "Bell" is established three times during the variable display of one special symbol, the number of times that the winning combination of "Bell" is established during this variable display is considered to be one, and the mini reel is used. 1 is added to the total number of times "Bell" of the information 16TM200 has been won.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. (e.g., set values such as 5, 6, etc., which are particularly advantageous for the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from that for other set values. For example, if the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestion mode (eg purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. When the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, gold mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. Regarding whether or not to use the first setting suggestion mode, a lottery is performed at a rate of once in 25 times as described above. A separate lottery may be conducted once in each round. Then, when it is determined to be the second setting suggestion mode, regardless of whether or not it is determined to be the first setting suggestion mode, the change number display 16TM040 is changed to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, the gold mode ).

(16) In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is set in common. Not limited to this, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may differ according to the variation pattern (variation time). For example, a variation pattern with a long variation time is better than a variation pattern with a short variation time. , the first setting suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate.

(17) In the above embodiment, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is executed at the bottom center of the screen, and the display result suggests the set value. The set value may be suggested by another effect executed in response to the variable display of the pattern. For example, an effect may be executed in which one of a plurality of types of characters appears in response to the variable display of the mini-slot symbols, and the set value may be suggested by the type of the character that has appeared.

Incidentally, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the mini-slot symbols may be performed in an area different from the central lower portion of the screen. For example, it may be executed in a region that is the right end or left end of the screen and does not overlap (does not overlap) the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5 is used. may be executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, the effects that affect the pending display and the effects that affect the active display are displayed in the lower center portion of the screen (see FIG. 9-10 (11)) or the lower right portion (FIG. 9-9 (5)). ), but these renditions may be performed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in a region that is the right end or left end of the screen and does not overlap (does not overlap) the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. may be executed.

(19) In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation level announcement effect by the variable display of the mini-slot symbols are shown as an example in which the performance is performed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), but not limited to this, It may be executed in a high-probability high base state or a high-probability low base state (KT control that tends to be a small hit than the normal state).

In such an effect configuration, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect (percentage of “Bell” as the established hand) is [ number of times) to (percentage of the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect in the game state (the number of times the established hand is "Bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot pattern)]. When the variable display of the mini-slot pattern is executed, [(the number of times that the mini-slot pattern variable display executed in the high-probability-high base state has become a "bell") ÷ (high-probability-high base The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated, and the setting value is suggested by the calculated value.In addition, the high probability low base state (KT state ), when variable display of mini-slot symbols is performed, [(Number of times the winning hand is “Bell” in variable display of mini-slot symbols performed in high-probability-low base state (KT state)) ÷ (Number of variable display times of decorative symbols (special symbols) executed in high-probability-low base state (KT state))], the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated, and the set value is suggested by the calculated value.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if changes and additions are made within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) Setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to the setting value,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The effect control means can execute the first setting suggestion effect related to the setting suggestion in a specific display area of the display areas of the display means (the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the mini-slot 16TM030 at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, In 5C1 and 5R1, by stopping and displaying the combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] as a combination of the same symbols, it is possible to execute an effect that the role of "Bell" is established). , a second setting suggestion effect related to the setting suggestion can be executed in a predetermined display area of the display area of the display means (an effect of displaying the change number display 16TM040 in the setting suggestion mode in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed) ) and
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) executes variable display (variable display), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a different rate according to the set value. (Step S16TM2000) determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. execution ratio is different)
moreover,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.). be done.
According to such a configuration, since the execution ratios of the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are different, it is possible for the player to guess the setting by combining the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect, and the interest is enhanced. can improve. Furthermore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the game state may be associated with the setting suggestion effect. For example, in the normal state, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than in the specific effect state. By doing so, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the set value in the normal state, and to raise the degree of attention to the big win in the specific performance state, thereby improving interest.

Also, the setting suggestion effect and the change effect may be associated with each other. For example, a plurality of modes of changing effects may be provided, and setting values may be suggested in the changing effects. By doing so, when the change effect is executed, not only the color change but also the set value can be estimated, which improves interest.

Also, the setting value may be associated with the display color of the specific display. For example, by providing a plurality of colors and providing a color related to the degree of expectation of the big win, a color related to the set value, and a color related to the big win and the set value, the degree of expectation for the big win and the set value can be guessed, thereby improving interest.

In addition, if the setting value is suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements of the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the display color of the specific display), the player can If a setting value advantageous to the player is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is advantageous to the player, and a setting value advantageous to the player is not suggested for a certain element. Even in this case, if advantageous setting values are suggested by other elements, the player can maintain the expectation that the setting values will be advantageous to the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
Note that setting values may be suggested based on three or more elements. In this way, when three or more elements suggest setting values that are advantageous to the player, the player can be more confident that the setting values are advantageous to the player, and Even if a certain element does not suggest a set value advantageous to the player, if the remaining elements suggest a set value advantageous to the player, the player will be convinced that the set value is advantageous to the player. In addition, since there are multiple types of remaining elements, the number of elements that suggest setting values that are advantageous to the player in the remaining elements changes (for example, three elements suggest setting values , there are cases where there are 0, 1, and 2 elements that suggest set values that are advantageous to the player in the remaining elements). can be further improved.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, there is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display or active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect is displayed in the changed display color, etc.) . The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

FIGS. 10-1(A) and 10-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, FIG. 10-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same value A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the first special figure display result judgment table when the game state is normal state or time saving state , the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the setting value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. A range of up to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1674) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value in a range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the setting value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, out of the hit determination value The range from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 10-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increasing the probability of a big win, making it easier to determine a specific kind of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characterizing portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing a RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the provisional set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the setting value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the lighting of the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that the pachinko machine 1 is changing or setting the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being checked. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, for example. ), perform the corresponding processing (step S10A), and terminate the processing within the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) to FXXX) may be cleared.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command according to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display section, second display section, third display section, and fourth display that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. As a result, regardless of whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, the effect control board 12 can store the setting value in a identifiable manner when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as a common numerical range for the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range of up to. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big-hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small-hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 74AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 074AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 074AK of this embodiment, as the pre-reading announcement effect, a change effect is performed in which the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) is changed to a different mode than usual. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 074AK, the image including the image that notifies the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state at least by the type of color, such as the display corresponding to the variable display, is set to the monochrome mode. It is possible to execute a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize whether the color is displayed (what degree of expectation the display color is). In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 074AK of this embodiment, when the change effect is executed during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display color of the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation, It has a feature that when the monochrome presentation ends, it becomes possible to visually recognize which level of expectation the display color is. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 074AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

Also, the state in which the monochrome effect is being executed may be referred to as the monochrome effect state or the specific effect state, and the state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed may be referred to as the normal effect state. In addition, in the monochrome rendering state in this embodiment, the background image is also in a monochrome mode, and is represented only by the shades of black. In addition, in the monochrome rendering state (specific rendering state), in addition to black shading, red or blue shading may be used, or black on green or black on red may be used. Furthermore, if it is impossible to recognize the degree of expectation due to color, and if the number of colors used is less than in the normal production state (unless it is full color), it is not limited to being displayed entirely in monochrome, for example, the background It may be displayed in two colors, such as displaying a part in monochrome (shading of black) and displaying the other part in yellow (a specific color such as yellow is displayed in that color, and the other part is displayed in may be displayed in shades of black). In addition, the monochrome effect changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the side of the effect control board 12 along with the start of execution of the monochrome effect. This is an effect in which the number of colors used when displaying a pre-stored effect image is displayed with a smaller number of colors than in the normal effect state. In other words, it does not store separate data such as the effect image for monochrome effect, but during the execution of monochrome effect (during specific effect state), the target image such as pending display or active display is changed effect. It is displayed in a monochrome mode regardless of whether it is broken or not.

FIG. 11-1 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When starting the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on ( step S201). When it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is ON (step S201; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the first special figure. It is determined whether or not the number of first special figure reserved memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game used, has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the stored value of the first special figure reservation storage number counter (counter for counting the number of first special figure reservation storage) provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102 By reading the special figure reservation storage number count value, it is sufficient if the first special figure reservation number can be specified. If it is determined in step S202 that the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores a starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.) A starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S203).

If it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or if it is determined that the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step S202 (step S202; If Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is ON (step S204). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game used, has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 is the stored value of the second special figure reservation storage number counter (counter for counting the number of second special figure reservation storage) provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102 By reading the special figure reservation storage number count value, it is sufficient if the second special figure reservation number can be specified. When it is determined in step S205 that the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the starting opening buffer value to "2" (step S206). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is not ON (step S204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103 Terminate the starting prize determination process.

After executing either the process of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates the special figure pending storage number count value according to the starting opening buffer value so as to add 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first special figure pending storage number count value is added by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending storage number count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the count value of the number of the first special figure reserved memory is increased by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. (increment). In addition, the second special figure pending memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. (increment). At this time, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting section, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated so as to add 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the starting winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or the random number data for determining the special figure display result is selected from the numerical data updated by the random counter or the like provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as the game control counter setting section). Numerical data representing the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored as pending data by being set at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure pending storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2", the suspension data is set in the second special figure suspension storage unit. In addition, at this time, when the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the first pending indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure pending storage added by one. (For example, the number of lit LEDs may be increased by one). In addition, when the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second pending display 25B to display the second special figure pending storage number added by one. You may make it carry out to the 2nd suspension indicator 25B (for example, the lighting number of LED is increased by one).

The first special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (first special The pending data of the special figure game using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Based on whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) Hold to make it possible to determine memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the first special figure reservation storage unit and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the pending data is stored in the first special figure pending storage unit, the pending display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the pending number associated with this pending data. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", the pending display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first pending display portion 5HL. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display pattern is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first pending display portion 5HL. do.

The second special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (the second It stores the pending data of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. It stores until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Thus, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Based on whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) Hold to make it possible to determine memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the second special figure reservation storage unit and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the pending data is stored in the second special figure pending storage unit, the pending display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the pending number associated with this pending data. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", the pending display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second pending display portion 5HR. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display pattern is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second pending display portion 5HR. do.

After executing the processing of step S210, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211). After that, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a reserved storage count notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S213). As described above, the random value determination process at the time of winning is a process of performing determination at the time of starting winning, and based on the random values MR1 and MR3 out of the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209, the random value is determined. This is the process of determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small hit" and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-4). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the start buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" ( Step S215), the starting winning judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes its stored value to "0". From (step S216), the process proceeds to step S204. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S213 of FIG. 11-1 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as "big hit" or "small hit". A determination is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small winning game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, determination of variation patterns corresponding to the variable display mode of the decoration pattern, etc. are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the random value determination process at the time of winning, the game ball is extracted at the start winning timing when it is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Determination of whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed of the random value obtained (the random value extracted in the process of step S209) is a "big hit" or "small hit", and determination of whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern Determine which variation pattern will be (so-called "look ahead"). As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening (before the condition for starting the special symbol game is established), the special symbol display result is "big hit" or A "small hit" or a variable display mode of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined display mode is read in advance, and based on the result of the read-ahead, the performance control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the performance control board 12 controls the pending display. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. ) or the state of the variable probability flag (the flag that is turned on when the variable probability state), etc., to specify the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S301). The CPU 103 determines whether or not the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state by checking the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag control unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified as a jackpot game state.

Following the processing of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified game state is a big win, which is a big win game state (step S302). If it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not it is in a high base in which high opening control associated with time reduction control is performed in the variable probability state or the time reduction state (step S303 ). If it is determined that the high base is in progress (step S303; Yes), or if it is determined in the process of step S302 that the jackpot is in progress (step S402; It is determined whether or not there is (step S304). When it is determined that the start buffer value is not "2" (step S304; No), the CPU 103 performs setting for limiting the winning determination (step S306).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start buffer value is "2" (step S304; Yes), or when it is determined in the process of step S303 that the high base is not in progress (step S303; No), the CPU 103 10 (A), (B) from the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, corresponding to the start opening buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current game state to select the special figure display result decision table used for deciding the special figure display result (step S305).

Following the processing of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). For example, the CPU 103 compares each decision value included in the jackpot decision range and the random number MR1 for deciding the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 11-1 one by one, It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be "big hit" (jackpot start determination). can.

In addition, in the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210, and uses the read random number value MR1 to perform the above determination. In addition, the CPU 103 holds the random number MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or the storage area of the CPU 103 separately from step S210, and the above determination is made based on the held random number. may be performed. This also applies to the random number value MR3, which will be described later. Thus, the random number value used in the random number determination process at the time of winning need not be the random number value stored in the special figure reservation storage unit.

When it is determined in the processing of step S307 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the big hit type determination table. The CPU 103 refers to the selected jackpot type determination table data to determine which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Following the process of step S308, the CPU 103 selects a later-described jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-5) prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance and sets it in the use table (step S309). The big hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern that will result in a "big hit" as a variable display result, and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of determination values. In an actual table, it suffices if a range of determination values corresponding to the determination ratios in FIG. 11-5 is assigned to each variation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio where 100 is the entire range of values (1 to 900) that the random number MR3 can take. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), when the jackpot type is probability variation / non-probability variation, the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the variation pattern Since the determination ratio of PB1-3 is 70, the variation pattern PB1-1 is assigned a determination value 1 to 45 (range of 5%) that is compared with the random value MR3, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is a random value. Determined values 46-270 (25% range) compared with MR3 are assigned, and variation patterns PB1-3 are assigned determined values 271-900 (70% range) compared with random value MR3. This assignment of decision values is the same for other tables describing decision percentages.

When it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range in the process of step S307 (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S310). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. , and whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

If it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a small hit variation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 (see FIG. 11-5 (B)) is selected and set in the use table (step S312). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is a "small hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), the loss variation pattern determination table (FIG. 11-5 (C), (D)) is selected and set in the use table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a non-time saving state (low base state) (when the time saving flag is off), the loss variation pattern determination of FIG. 11-5 (C) If the table is set to the use table and the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a time saving state (high base state) (when the time saving flag is on), the loss variation of FIG. 11-5 (D) Set the pattern determination table to the used table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern that results in a "loss" variable display result, and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3.

After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the big hit variation pattern set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S209. With reference to either the table, small hit variation pattern determination table, or loss variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern assigned to the determination value matching the random value MR3 is determined (step S313). For example, the CPU 103 compares the individual determined values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number MR3 one-by-one to determine whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number MR3, thereby determining the variation pattern. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determined values assigned to each variation pattern, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR3 and the minimum determined value A variation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing either of the processes of steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start-winning-time command according to the determination results of steps S308 and S313 (step S314), and performs the winning-time random value determination process. exit. The starting winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure reservation memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. When the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the command at the time of starting winning is the first start winning mouth designation command, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation Configure settings for transmission of commands. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the command at the time of starting winning is the second start winning opening designation command, the second special figure reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation. Configure settings for transmission of commands. Commands set for transmission are transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure pending storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure pending storage number specification command to be set for transmission are the commands that specify the current 1st special figure pending storage number and the 2nd special figure pending storage number A command containing the corresponding EXT data), and the number of special figure pending storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure pending storage number counter or the second special figure pending storage number counter. When the determination result of step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol designation command to be transmitted is a command designating that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" ("big hit"). command including corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result of step S307 is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" (" command including EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the determination result of step S310 is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), the command specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is "loss" (command including EXT data corresponding to "failure"), and when the determination result of step S303 is the start buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), "no determination" that determination at the time of starting winning is not performed (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies the variation pattern that is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result), When the determination result of step S304 is the start buffer value=1 (step S304; No), a command (EXT command including data).

In the winning random number determination process, as described above, the variable display corresponding to the random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted this time in step S209 is such that the variable display result of the variable display (special game) is "big win" or "small hit". It is determined whether or not it will be a "hit" and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-5), so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current game state, and not based on the game state when the variable display is actually executed. Variable display results and variation patterns can be predicted with precision. In addition, in the random number determination process at the time of winning, when it is determined that it is a big hit in the process of step S302, or based on the fact that it is determined that it is under time reduction control in the process of step S303, it is started by the process of step S304 Determine whether the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, when the start buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process of step S305 and the like is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S314, and the start win determination is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed, or when it is in the jackpot gaming state, each of the above based on the occurrence of the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening Restricts judgment from being made. As a result, when the special game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, the first start winning prize is obtained during the time saving control or in the jackpot game state. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by restricting the execution of prefetch based on.

FIG. 11-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S261). When it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S262). When it is determined that the big hit flag is off in the process of step S261 (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the OFF state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is "loss" according to the number of pending memories. (Step S265).

FIG. 11-4 shows specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment.

Variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", specifies non-reach (variable display mode does not reach reach mode), and special figure variation time is normal It is a non-reach variable pattern of length. This variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the number of reserved memories is less than two.

Variation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", specifies non-reach (variable display mode does not become reach mode), and special figure variation time is longer than usual is also a short (shortened) non-reach variation pattern. The variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the number of pending memories is 2 or more.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach A. FIG. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach B. FIG.

The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach A. FIG. Variation patterns PB1-3 are selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and are reach variation patterns that designate execution of super reach B. FIG.

The variation pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big win" and the big win type is "probability" and when the variable display result is "minor win", and designates non-reach. It is a non-reach fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big win" and the big win type is "definite hit", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and is dedicated to the big hit/small win. It is a reach variation pattern that specifies reach execution. Here, the definite/minor hit dedicated reach is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is a definite big hit or a small hit. The decoration pattern for the sudden hit is a pattern in which a combination of left, middle, and right decoration patterns is stopped and displayed as ``3'', ``5'', and ``7''. Further, the decoration pattern for the small win is a pattern in which the combinations of the left, middle and right decoration patterns are stopped and displayed as "2", "4" and "6".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. be done. As an example, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation, and determines the variation assigned to the determined value that matches the random number MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 11-5(A), determination ratios are shown instead of determination values.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, previously stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, using the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined. As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. A variation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 11-5(B), determination ratios are shown instead of determination values.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. A variation pattern is determined. When the gaming state is a non-time saving state (time saving flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5(C). When the game state is the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5(D). As an example, in each losing variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation, and determines the variation assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIGS. 11-5(C) and (D), determination ratios are shown instead of determination values.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, at the time of the big hit (probability / non-probability), the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-3 that executes the super reach B is the highest, the variation pattern PB1-2 of the super reach A, normal reach The decision ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 of . At the time of loss, the determination ratio of non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, normal reach fluctuation pattern PA2-1, super reach A fluctuation pattern PA2-2, super reach B The determination ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation patterns PA2-3. For this reason, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the ratio of the variable display result to be "big hit" (so-called big hit expectation) decreases. That is, the variable display with the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win has a higher percentage of the variable display result being a “big win” than the variable display without the ready-to-win effect. In other words, the longer the variable display period (variable display time), the higher the rate of the variable display result being a "big hit".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, at the time of the big hit (probably), the decision ratio of the fluctuation pattern PC1-2 of the probability/small hit reach is higher than the decision ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the time of the small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the sudden probability/small hit reach variation pattern PC1-2. From this, when the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden/small hit reach is executed, the variable display result is likely to be "big hit (probably)", and when the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is executed, The variable display result tends to be a "small hit".

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265 in FIG. 11-3, the CPU 103 sets a special figure variation time (also referred to as variation time), which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the special symbol variation in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is. Toku-zu fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 12, is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing of deriving the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol by setting the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264 and S265. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time to a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step S266, of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, start Setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games for which the conditions are established (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A special figure game is started by this. In addition, when the variable display using the first special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display device 25A to display the number of the first special figure reservation storage that has been subtracted by one. This may be performed by the pending indicator 25A (for example, the number of lit LEDs may be reduced by one). In addition, when the variable display using the second special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display device 25B to display the second special figure reservation storage number decremented by one. You may make it carry out to the reservation indicator 25B (for example, the number of lighting of LED is reduced by one).

After executing the processing of step S267, the CPU 103, in order to notify the effect control board 12 side of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, etc., the command at the time of the variation start of the special symbol (command at the time of variation start). Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 transmits the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), first special figure pending storage number specification command ( Command including EXT data indicating the first special figure reserved memory number count value subtracted by 1, that is, the first special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special game)) is sent sequentially. Make transmission settings for On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command ( Command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure pending storage number specification command (1 A command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory number count value that has been reduced, that is, the second special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sent sequentially. Configure transmission settings for

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and ends the variation pattern setting process. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 5 is executed.

Next, processing in the effect control board 12 of the characterizing portion 074AK in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-6 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command from the main board 11 (start winning opening designation command, special figure reserved memory number designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command). It is determined whether or not there is (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer (step S402). If the first start winning opening designation command or the first special reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, the start winning command (first start winning opening designation command, first special reserved memory number designation command , pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . When receiving the second start winning mouth designation command or the second special reserved memory number designation command as the start winning prize command, the start winning command (second start winning mouth designation command, second special reserved memory number designation command , pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a command buffer at the time of second start winning provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 .

FIG. 11-7(A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning command received at the first start winning are stored. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, a storage area that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of the first special figure reserved storage (for each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4) area) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the characterizing part 074AK in this embodiment is an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed are stored as the pending display number "0". is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of the second start winning).

When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning mouth, 4 commands, 1st start winning mouth designation command, 1st special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command A set effect control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start winning opening designation command, first special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is each reserved A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in correspondence with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the first start winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The empty area of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the first starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure reservation storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, the first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing display mode change patterns, which will be described later, as a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers. . The display mode change pattern is a type indicating a change (transition) pattern of the display mode of the pending display. The display mode change patterns corresponding to the pending display numbers "0" to "4" in the example shown in FIG. , "0", and "0" are stored. "PT4-4-22" and "PT3-2-04" are display mode change patterns determined when the pending storage count (holding count) is "4" and "3", respectively, as will be described later. There is a pattern in which the display mode changes twice and a pattern in which the display mode changes once. When the display mode change pattern is "0", the display mode change pattern is not set and the pending notice effect is not executed. remains "white" (in the illustrated example, the hold is not stored in the first place). Although illustration is omitted, information (stage number) is also provided (stage number storage area) (the same applies to the second start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 11-7(B)).

Also, FIG. 11-7(B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning command received at the second start winning are stored. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, a storage area capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum number of second special figure reserved storage (for example, 4) (corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4 area) is provided. As with the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer in the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, has a pending display number of "0", which is displayed as a variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start winning to the 2nd start winning mouth, 4 commands, 2nd start winning mouth designation command, 2nd special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command A set effect control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start winning opening designation command, second special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is each reserved A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the empty area of the second start winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The empty area of the second start winning command buffer, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the second starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure reservation storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first start winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers is provided, and a display step change pattern described later is provided. A storage area is provided for storage. The example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) shows an example in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the pending display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 11-6, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command is received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the contents of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high probability flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit), and is turned on in response to the probability variable state. The ON state/OFF state is switched corresponding to the switching of the ON state/OFF state. The high base flag, for example, is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit), and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and the time saving flag on the main board 11 side. The ON state/OFF state is switched corresponding to the switching of the ON state/OFF state. For example, the effect control CPU120, if the gaming state specification command is to specify a high probability high base state (for example, if the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is specified to be ON), high probability flag and high Both of the base flags are turned on (if they are already on, they are kept on; hereinafter the same applies to the on/off states of both flags). If the gaming state specification command is to specify a high probability low base state (for example, if the probability variation flag specifies that the time saving flag is turned off in the ON state), the high probability flag is turned on, and the high base Turn off the flag. If the game state specification command specifies a low-probability base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variation flag and the time-saving flag are off), both the high-probability flag and the high-base flag turn off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and performs command analysis processing. exit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11-8, processing executed in response to reception of each effect control command in the command analysis processing will be described. The contents shown in the item "processing contents" shown in FIG. 11-8 are, for example, the processing executed in step S405. Further, the step number shown in the item "processing content" indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 11-6, and means that the corresponding step processing is executed. Further, each reception flag and each storage area shown in the item of “processing content” are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Also, setting the reception flag means turning it on.

For example, when the received production control command is a variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a variation pattern command reception flag.

Also, for example, when the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 .

FIG. 11-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. When the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the start winning command is received (step 074AKS001). When it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step 074AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received starting winning command is the first reserved storage number addition command received in the low base state or the high It is determined whether or not it is one of the second reserve storage number addition designation commands received in the base state (step 074AKS002). In this embodiment, by executing the process of step 074AKS002, in the low base state, it becomes possible to execute the pending notice effect (change effect) when the pending memory increases based on the winning to the first start winning hole. , in the high base state, when the pending memory increases based on the winning to the second starting winning hole, the pending notice performance (variation performance) can be executed.

If it is determined to be either the first starting winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 074AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed (step 074AKS003). For example, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the active display mode determination table shown in FIGS. It determines the display mode of the active display as the final change destination of the display or the reserved display displayed as the second reserved display (how many steps to change when the change effect is executed). It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result designation command included in the start winning command.

Next, determination of the display mode of active display will be described. In this embodiment, a change effect is executed in which the display mode (including at least the color) of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started and the active display corresponding to the variable display that is being executed is changed step by step. . The active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-10 is a table for determining in advance the display mode of the active display (also referred to as "final display mode"), which is the final stage of the change (transition) of this display mode. The active display mode determination table, as shown in FIG. 11-10, is used to determine which of stages 1 to 4 the final display mode should be for each variable display result (including jackpot types and variation patterns). are assigned a determined proportion of More specifically, the variable display result is classified into "big hit (probable / non-probable)", "big hit (probably)", "losing (super reach) / small hit", "other than above", respectively, Different determination ratios are assigned to "white", "blue", "green", and "red" prepared as display colors of the active display. In this embodiment, active display is performed in colors such as white in stage 1, blue in stage 2, green in stage 3, and red in stage 4. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11-10, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probability variable/non-probability variation)" in which a 16-round game is executed, the active display mode (display color), which is the final display mode, is ``Green'', which is ``Stage 3'', has the highest percentage of decisions, and the percentage of decisions is lower in the order of ``Blue'', ``Stage 2'', ``White'', ``Stage 1'', and ``Red'', ``Stage 4''. is set to On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (accurate)" in which two rounds of the game are played, the ratio of determining the active display mode (display color) to "green", which is "level 3", is the highest, Next, the decision ratio of "blue" in "level 2" is high, and the decision ratio of "red" in "level 4" and "white" in "level 1" is set to be the lowest. In addition, when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit" including super reach effects in the variation pattern, the active display mode (display color) is "step 2" "blue ” is the highest, followed by the same percentage for “white” in “stage 1” and “green” in “stage 3”, followed by “red” in “stage 4”. there is If the variable display result does not correspond to any of the above-mentioned "big hit (probability / non-probability)", "big hit (probably)", "losing (super reach)", "minor hit", the active display mode ( display color), the decision ratio is set only for "white". Further, when the variable display result is "miss", the active display mode (display color) is set not to be determined to be "red".

With these settings, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage of "stage 4", the variable display result will always be "big hit". can be notified. In addition, when the active display changes to the "green" stage of "stage 3", it can be suggested that the variable display result is likely to be a "jackpot" (probability/non-probability/abrupt probability). . In addition, if it remains "white" of "step 1", the possibility that the variable display result will be "losing" or "minor hit" is high, and if the pending notice effect is executed (that is, When the display mode of the pending display changes), it can be suggested that there is a higher possibility that the control will be in a state more advantageous to the player than when it is not executed.

In the change effect (suspended notice effect), the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" in which the variable display result always becomes "big win" is also called a big win decision stage. It should be noted that the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is the jackpot confirmation stage, and as shown in FIG. Because it is only selected, its rarity value is high. In the illustrated example, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is shown as the big hit confirmation stage, but for example, when the variable display result is "losing" or "minor hit", it is also determined You may do so (that is, it may not be a big hit confirmation). In this case, if the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is determined, the possibility of becoming a "jackpot" will increase (the higher the number of stages, the higher the possibility of becoming a "jackpot". ), it is sufficient to set the decision ratio.

Returning to FIG. 11-9, after determining the display mode of the active display by the process of step 074AKS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003, the first special figure pending memory number designation command and the second The display mode change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved memories indicated by one of the 2 special figure reserved memory number designation commands, and the first reserved display or the second reserved display is displayed (step 074AKS004). In addition, the number of reserved memories is the first special figure reserved memory number specification command when the first start winning mouth specification command is received, and the second special figure when the second start winning mouth specification command is received. It can be specified by referring to the reserved storage number designation command. In the processing of step 074AKS004, the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15 is referenced to determine the display mode change pattern for the first pending display or second pending display. The display mode change pattern indicates a change pattern such as how many times the pending display is shifted to which stage (which display color) to transition to until the active display, which is the final stage, is displayed. The display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 is stored in the display mode variation pattern in the command buffer for the first start winning shown in FIG. 11-7 or the command buffer for the second start winning shown in FIG. 11-7. stored in the area.

11-11 to 11-15, the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15 determines the display mode change pattern indicating the change in the display mode of the pending display and the active display, which are subject to the notice of the pending notice effect, as described above. This table is referenced to The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the pending number (suspended display number of the pending memory that is the notice target of the pending notice effect) and the active display mode (final display mode). Specifically, depending on the number of pending "4" to "2", and the active display of "white", "blue", "green", "red" such as "stage 1" to "stage 4" The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the display color. In addition, in each display mode change pattern determination table classified by the number of reservations and the active display mode, "jackpot (16R)" ("jackpot (probability / non-probability)"), "jackpot (probability)", "loss (super A different decision ratio is assigned to the display mode change pattern set according to the active display mode (final display mode) for each variable display result such as "reach" and "minor win".

The pending display is displayed in any stage of 'white', 'blue', 'green' and 'red' such as 'stage 1' to 'stage 4' at the start of the pending display associated with the start winning. In addition, the pending display is displayed in shift as the pending memory is consumed, and at the timing when the change effect (holding notice effect) is executed, during the execution of the new variable display (including the variable display corresponding to the active display) , can be changed to different display colors (steps), and "white" as "step 1" → "blue" as "step 2" → "green" as "step 3" → "green" as "step 4" It changes step by step in the order of red. Also, the active display may be displayed by changing the stage from the reserved display corresponding to the reserved display number "1". In addition, when changing the stage, only a change to a higher stage is allowed (no change from a higher stage to a lower stage), for example, "white" in "stage 1" → "green" in "stage 3" It may change to a higher stage by omitting the middle.

Figures 11-11 (A) to 11-12 (D) show when the number of pending memories (holding number) is "4" (when the pending memory of the notice target of the pending notice effect is the hold display number "4") is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to by , and a display mode change pattern indicating a change in the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is set. It is

FIG. 11-11(A) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "white" of "stage 1". As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), when the final display mode is "white" of "stage 1", the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and "0" Only the display mode change pattern PT4-1-01 (the number of display mode changes "0") is set so that the display color of the active display remains "white" of "step 1", and the decision ratio assigned for each variable display result is set. is uniformly 100%.

FIG. 11-11(B) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "blue" of "stage 2". As shown in FIG. 11-11(B), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "stage 2". PT 4-2-01 (the number of times the display mode has changed is "0"), which remains "blue", and is "step 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", and the pending display number "3" ~ PT 4-2-02 ~ 05 (display mode change number of times "1") is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-11(B), when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "minor win", display mode change pattern PT4-2-02 with display mode change count of "1" to 05, the decision ratio assigned to the display mode change pattern PT4-2-05 is the highest compared to other variable display results, and the decision ratio assigned to PT4-2-02 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", it is assigned to PT4-2-02 among the display mode change patterns PT4-2-02 to PT4-2-05 whose display mode change count is "1". The decision percentage is the highest and the decision percentage assigned to PT 4-2-05 is the lowest.

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes from "white" of "step 1" to "blue" of "step 2", the variable display is "big hit (16R) It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-2-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 2" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 2" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Further, the display mode change pattern determination table is determined so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes from "stage 1" to "stage 2", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You can set a percentage. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display.

FIG. 11-11(C) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "green" of "stage 3". As shown in FIG. 11-11(C), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "step 3". PT 4-3-01 (display mode change count “0”), which remains “green” and does not change, and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4” is “stage 1” and the pending display number “3” ~ PT4-3-02 ~ 05 that changes from "white" of "step 1" to "green" of "step 3" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to "0" (display mode change number "1 ”), and “blue” in “stage 2” in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4”, and in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers “3” to “0” In PT4-3-06-09 (display mode change number "1") that changes from "level 2" "blue" to "level 3" "green" and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" "Stage 1" "white" and "stage 1" "white" to "stage 2" "blue" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" , and PT4-3-10 to PT4-3-14 (number of times of display mode change "2") for changing from "blue" of "step 2" to "green" of "step 3" are set.

As shown in FIG. 11-11(C), in the characterizing portion 074AK in this embodiment, the ratio determined so that the higher the number of times the display mode changes, the higher the expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". is assigned. Further, the determination ratio is assigned such that the later the timing of changing to the "green" display mode of "step 3", the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be "big hit (16R)".

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the timing at which the display mode changes to 'green' of 'stage 3' is delayed, and the greater the number of changes, the more the variable display becomes 'big hit (16R)'. suggest that it is likely. Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-3-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 3" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 3" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes to "stage 3", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. In addition, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the pattern that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" at once in multiple stages has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You may set the determination ratio of a table. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIG. 11-12(D) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "red" of "stage 4". As shown in FIG. 11-12(D), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "stage 4". PT 4-4-01 (the number of times the display mode has changed is "0"), and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" is "white" at "step 1", and the pending display PT 4-4-02 to 05 (display mode number of changes "1") and "blue" of "step 2" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" Corresponds to PT 4-4-06 to 09 (number of display mode changes "1") that changes from "blue" of "stage 2" to "red" of "stage 4" in any of the above, and the pending display number "4" "Green" of "Stage 3" in the pending display, and "Green" of "Stage 3" to "Stage 4" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" PT 4-4-10 to 13 (the number of display stage changes "1") that changes to "red" of ", and "white" of "step 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", From ``white'' in ``step 1'' to ``blue'' in ``step 2'' and further from ``blue'' in ``step 2'' in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" PT 4-4-14 to 19 (display stage change number "2") that changes to "red" in "stage 4" and "white" in "stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" In either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0", from "level 1" "white" to "level 3" "green", further "level 3" " PT 4-4-20 to 25 (display mode change number "2") that changes from "green" to "red" in "stage 4", and in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", "stage 1" " "White", and in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0", from "White" in "Stage 1" to "Blue" in "Stage 2", to "Stage 2" ” from “blue” to “step 3” “green”, and from “step 3” “green” to “step 4” “red” PT 4-4-26 to 29 (display step change number “3 ”) is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-12(D), in the characterizing part 074AK in this embodiment, the rate is determined so that the higher the number of times the display mode changes, the higher the expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". is assigned. Further, the decision ratio is assigned such that the later the timing of changing to the "red" display mode of "stage 4", the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". In addition, if the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the final display mode will not be "stage 4", so the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 to 17 has a determination ratio Not assigned.

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the timing at which the display mode changes to "red" of "stage 4" is delayed and the number of times of change increases, the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". suggest that it is likely. Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-4-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 4" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 4" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes to "stage 4", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. Also, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the pattern that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "red" in "stage 4" at once in multiple stages has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You may set the determination ratio of a table. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIGS. 11-13(A) to 11-14(D) are display stages referred to when the number of reservations is "3" (when the reservation memory of the notice object of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "3"). This is a change pattern determination table, in which display step change patterns indicating changes in the display steps of pending displays corresponding to pending display numbers "3" to "1" and active displays corresponding to "0" are set. In addition, FIGS. 11-15 (A) to (D) show the display step change pattern referred to when the number of reservations is "2" (when the reservation memory for the notice target of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "2") This is a determination table, and display step change patterns indicating the display steps of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "2" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are set. 11-11(A) to 11-12(D), similar to the display mode change pattern determination tables in FIGS. A decision ratio is assigned so that the variable display is more likely to be a "jackpot (16R)".

Returning to the explanation of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. By making the image including the image notified by in a monochrome mode, a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize which kind of color is displayed (which display color is expected) A monochrome effect setting process for execution is executed (step 074AKS005). In addition, in the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, after executing the processes of steps 074AKS003 and 074AKS004, the monochrome effect setting process is performed in step 074AKS005. is executed, the display mode of the active display and the display mode change pattern may be determined.

FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the monochrome effect setting process executed in step 074AKS005 of FIG. 11-9. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-16 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag indicating that the monochrome effect is being executed is set to the ON state (step 074AKS051). If the monochrome effect flag is ON (step 074AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process. The monochrome effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example.

When the monochrome effect flag is in the OFF state (step 074AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold (including an active display) in which the display mode changes before the current hold targeted for the pre-reading notice. exists, that is, whether or not the display form of the pending or active display existing in front (display form in front) changes (step 074AKS051A). In step 074AKS051A, the content of the command buffer at the time of start winning may be checked to determine. Specifically, the display mode change pattern corresponding to the pending display number before the pending display number targeted this time is confirmed. Then, it is determined whether or not the front display mode changes.

When the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process. In the characteristic portion 074AK, once the monochrome effect is executed, at least the monochrome effect is continued until the variable display corresponding to the target pending display is started. And it becomes impossible to visually recognize the change of the active display. Therefore, when the front display mode changes, the change in the front display mode is made visible without executing the monochrome effect.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of display mode changes is one or more, that is, whether or not to execute a change effect (step 074AKS052 ). Whether or not the display mode change count is one or more may be determined by confirming the display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. 11-9. When the display mode change count is 0 (step 074AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process.

If the display mode change count is one or more (step 074AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the monochrome effect according to the variable display result and according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. step 074AKS053). As shown in FIG. 11-17, in the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, when the monochrome effect is executed, the variable display result is determined to have a higher expectation of a big hit than when the monochrome effect is not executed. is assigned. Also, when the monochrome effect is executed, the determination ratio is assigned so as to be super reach or higher (super reach loss, small hit, big hit). Not limited to this, even in the case of normal reach loss or non-reach loss, monochrome effect may be executed at a lower rate than other variable display results. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the monochrome effect is assigned according to the variable display result. Different determination ratios may be used. For example, the determination rate may be highest when the display mode of the active display is "red", and the determination rate may decrease in the order of "green" > "blue" > "white". According to this, it is possible to inform the player that the display mode of the active display will finally change to a highly anticipated display color, and to give the player a sense of anticipation for the change in the active display.

Returning to FIG. 11-16, after executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054). If the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

If the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the end timing of the monochrome effect from "timing 1" to "timing 1" according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 3” (step 074AKS055). The "timing 1" of the characteristic portion 074AK in this embodiment is the timing of the normal reach, that is, the timing immediately after entering the reach state, the "timing 2" is the timing at the start of the reach effect of the super reach, and the "timing 3 ” is the timing in the middle of the reach production of super reach. That is, "timing 1" is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, "timing 2" is the next earliest, and "timing 3" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 11-18, in the feature part 074AK in this embodiment, the expectation level is "timing 3" > "timing 2" > "timing 1", and the timing from the start of the variable display to the end timing The determination ratio is set so that the longer the period (end timing is later) (in other words, the longer the execution period of the monochrome effect), the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit". Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution period of the monochrome effect. In addition, as shown in the figure, if the variable display result is neither "big hit (probable / non-probable)", "big hit (probably)", or "losing (super reach) / small hit", but "other than the above" , no decision ratio is assigned because no monochrome effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-16, after executing the process of step 074AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing a monochrome effect (step 074AKS056). By performing the process of step 074AKS056, the execution of monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started. As a result, monochrome target images, such as pending display, active display, and background image, are displayed in monochrome mode. In the characteristic part 074AK of this embodiment, the pending display and the active display are displayed in the first stage "white" (displayed in a display color that is displayed at a high rate before execution of the change effect). In step 074AKS056, output sounds such as sound effects and performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome performance are muted, and a game effect lamp for game effects is turned off. Control for extinguishing 9 is performed. After executing the process of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120 sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and then ends the monochrome effect setting process. In step 074AKS056, for example, when an image to be monochrome is displayed in two colors, black and white, due to monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to two colors, black and white. The number of colors may correspond to the number of colors.

Returning to the description of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. If it is determined that it is neither a command (step 074AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pending display or the second pending display in the first stage (white) display mode (step 074AKS005A ).

After executing the processing of either step 074AKS005 or step 074AKS005A, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received in the processing of step 074AKS001 (step 074AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of variation. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (step 074AKS006). Effect control CPU120, for example, by referring to whether or not either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set, whether or not the fluctuation start designation command is received It is necessary to determine whether If it is determined that the variation start designation command has not been received (step 074AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display setting process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start designation command is received (step 074AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007). . When it is determined that the received variation start designation command is not the second variation start designation command, that is, the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 Referring to the display stage variation pattern stored in the storage area of the display stage variation pattern in the first start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), each first pending display is associated with It is changed or maintained according to the display step change pattern, and in the first reservation display portion 5HL of the image display device 5, the reservation display of the reservation display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and "2 ” to “4” are moved (shifted) one by one to the right (step 074AKS008).

After executing the processing of step 074AKS008, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the reservation display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and corresponds to the reservation display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS009), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the storage contents of the reserved display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start prize are derived and displayed after the final stop pattern is derived and displayed in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it later.

In the processing of step 074AKS007, if it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the second start winning shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) By referring to the display step change pattern stored in the display step change pattern storage area in the hour command buffer, each second pending display is changed or maintained according to the display step change pattern associated with each, and the image display device In the second holding display portion 5HR of 5, the holding display of the holding display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and each second holding display corresponding to "2" to "4" is moved leftward one by one (step 074AKS010).

After executing the process of step 074AKS010, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the pending display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and corresponds to the pending display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS011), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the stored content of the pending display number "0" in the second start winning command buffer is derived and displayed after the final stop pattern is derived and displayed in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it later.

11-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first, for example, based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11, etc. It is determined whether or not the result of the graphic display is "loss" (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "losing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, receives the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 (stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area The variation pattern specified by the command) is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2, PC1-1) corresponding to the case of "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode. It is determined whether or not (step S552).

When it is determined that it is a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S552 (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S553 ). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the non-reach combination updated by the production random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. Determined decorative patterns (decorative patterns of non-ready-to-win combinations) are determined by referring to a pre-stored and prepared non-ready-to-win combination decorative pattern determination table.

When it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S552 (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of final stop symbols constituting the reach combination (step S554 ). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the ready-to-win combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for producing, and prepares the ready-to-win combination which is stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to the decorative design determination table, etc., the determined decorative design (decorative design of the reach combination) is determined.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "losing" in the process of step S551 (step S551; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "definite". Or, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S555). If it is determined that the special figure display result is "probability" or "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, an open chance eye, in the case of "probability" or "small hit". A combination of final decoration symbols corresponding to the case is determined (step S556). Effect control CPU120, for example, in response to the fact that either the variation pattern PC1-1 or PC1-2 is specified by the variation pattern specification command, out of the plurality of types of open chance eyes, the final A combination of fixed decoration patterns to be a stop pattern is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the chance number to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting section is extracted, and a predetermined chance number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to it, it is sufficient to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that constitute one of the open chances. In the chance determination table, there are, for example, "3", "5" and "7" composed of odd numbers as the chances for the big hit, and "2" and "7" composed of even numbers as the chance for the small win. 4", "6", etc. may be set.

In the processing of step S555, if the special figure display result is determined to be neither "probably" nor "small hit" (step S555; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol that constitutes the big hit combination. A combination of symbols is determined (step S557). The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit fixed symbol that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect. Subsequently, according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5 is displayed by referring to a jackpot determination symbol determination table stored in advance and prepared in the ROM 121. The decoration symbols having the same symbol number, which are stop-displayed together in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the display area, are determined.

After executing any one of the processes of steps S553, S554, S556, and S557, the effect control CPU 120 performs a plurality of types of change effects with different periods from the start of the variable display until the display mode of the pending display changes. Of these, a change effect setting process for setting which type of change effect is to be executed is executed (step 074AKS021).

FIG. 11-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step 074AKS021 of FIG. 11-19. When the change effect setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display mode of any pending display or active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022). In step 074AKS022, by referring to the display step change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. is changed, or whether the display mode of the active display is changed.

When the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the change effect of the success mode (step 074AKS023). , ends the change effect setting process. On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending display or the active display does not change in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the setting for executing the change effect of the failure mode or the setting not to execute the change effect is performed. (Step 074AKS024), the change effect setting process is terminated. In step 074AKS024, whether or not to execute the change effect of the failure mode may be determined according to the variable display result or the variation pattern, for example.

The effect of changing the success mode of the characterizing part 074AK in this embodiment is the effect of changing the display mode when the shooting star image 074AK001 collides with the pending display or active display to be changed. The failure mode change effect is a effect in which the shooting star image 074AK002 collides with the pending display or active display to be changed, but the display mode is not changed. In both modes, the image of the shooting star is the same, and it is impossible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the object changes until after the collision. In addition, during the monochrome effect, the pending display and the active display of the change target are also displayed in monochrome, so it is not possible to visually recognize whether the executed change effect is a success mode or a failure mode. there is

In the processing of step 074AKS023 and step 074AKS024, when executing a change effect, the execution period (change effect period) of the change effect is also set. The change effect period may be any period as long as it is a period during which the variable display being executed is not performed during the ready-to-win effect of super reach. This is to prevent the player's attention from being dispersed due to the degree of expectation being dispersed between the ready-to-win effect being executed and the change effect.

Also, if there are a plurality of objects to be changed, any one of success mode, failure mode, and no change effect may be determined for each suspension (including active display). In addition, when the display mode change pattern is determined, the pattern of the change effect may also be determined from among a plurality of patterns for one display mode change pattern.

Returning to the description of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-19, after executing the process of step 074AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the effect control pattern (step S560 ). Production control CPU120, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command, selects one of the plurality of prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern), use set as a pattern. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (suspended display change pattern) corresponding to the execution setting of the pending display change effect by the pending display setting process of step S161, and selects the use pattern set as Also, when it is determined in step S559 that the specific effect is to be executed, one of the effect control patterns (specific effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution of the specific effect is selected and set as the usage pattern.

Following the process of step S560, the production control CPU 120, for example, corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command, the production provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 The initial value of the control process timer is set (step S561). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation) determined in the process of step S559 VDP of the display control unit 123 , etc., to start the fluctuation of the decorative patterns in the respective “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. All you have to do is

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. exit.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display executed in step S172 shown in FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step S801). Production control CPU120, for example, to update the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update. Then, it is determined that the variable display time has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed in the process of step S801 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (step S802). The ready-to-win effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined according to the variation pattern, for example. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the ready-to-win effect (step S803).

After executing the process of step S803, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031). Since the end timing of the monochrome effect is determined to be one of the timings 1 to 3 at step 074AKS055 in FIG. It should be determined whether or not there is

When it is time to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect end control to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS032), and clears the monochrome effect flag to the OFF state (step 074AKS032). 074AKS033). In the process of step 074AKS032, since the monochrome output process is completed, the number of colors used for the target image to be displayed in the monochrome mode returns to the normal number of colors. Therefore, control is performed to display the pending display and the active display whose display mode has been changed by the change effect in the display color after the change, and to output the success sound.

After executing the processing of step 074AKS033, if it is determined that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step S802 (step S802; No), or if it is determined that it is not the end timing of monochrome effect in step 074AKS031 (step 074AKS031; No), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode (step 074AKS034). The change effect period is set in accordance with the setting to execute the change effect at step 074AKS023 or step 074AKS024 in FIG. 11-20. When it determines with it being a change production|presentation period (step 074AKS034; Yes), CPU120 for production|presentation control performs control for performing the change production|presentation of a success mode or a failure mode (step 074AKS035). In the process of step 074AKS035, during the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is ON), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, Regardless of the degree of expectation of a big hit, pending display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern. In addition, in the processing of step 074AKS035, the execution start sound of the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode, that is, the effect start sound for informing the player that the shooting star image has been displayed, and the success effect or failure effect are performed. A success sound or a failure sound that makes it audibly recognizable is output. However, during execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is ON), only the execution start sound is output, and the success sound or failure sound is not output. The success sound or the failure sound may be output at the timing when the monochrome effect is completed, for example, by the processing of step 074AKS032. According to this, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the pending display or the active display to be changed is changed after the monochrome effect is finished.

After executing the process of step 074AKS035, or if it is not a change production period (step 074AKS034; No), the production control CPU 120, for example, based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other , control for executing effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative patterns (step 808).

When it is determined that the variable display time has passed in the process of step S801 (step S801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Then, control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S809). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined fixed time as a wait time for receiving a command to start a big hit (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S812).

After executing any of the processes of steps S808 and S812, or when it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received in the process of step S809 (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display. End the process.

FIGS. 11-22 and 11-23 show examples of effect operations when a monochrome effect and a change effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 11-22(A), a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is displayed in a state in which three pending displays H1 to H3 are stored. In this state, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds, and the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning slot (reservation display H4 is displayed), the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 11-9, and the monochrome effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-22(B), in the image display device 5, the background image, the hold display, etc. are displayed in a monochrome mode, and the sound effects, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control is performed to mute the sound and turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. FIG. 11-22(B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-22(A) is finished. Further, an example is shown in which the display mode of the pending display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIGS. 11-12. In this example, it is assumed that timing C, which is the middle stage of super ready-to-win, is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect at step 074AKS055 in FIG. 11-16.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-22(C), when each pending display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is started, the pending display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Since the suspension of the suspension display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the suspension display H4 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the effect of changing the success mode set in the process of step 074AKS023 in FIG. 11-20 is performed. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. Although the effect start sound for informing the player of the fact is output, the success sound is not output. In addition, since the pending display is displayed in a monochrome mode during the monochrome presentation, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (success mode or failure mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-22(D), the ready-to-reach effect of super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. As indicated by -22(F), each hold display shifts and a variable display corresponding to hold display H2 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display. Therefore, when the failure mode change effect is set in the processing of step 074AKS024 in FIG. 11-20, the failure mode change effect is performed as shown in FIG. 11-22(F). Even if the failure mode change performance is executed, the execution start sound, that is, the performance start sound for informing the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed is output, but the failure sound is not output. In addition, since the pending display is displayed in a monochrome mode during the monochrome presentation, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (success mode or failure mode).

Subsequently, when the game ball newly wins the first start winning slot (reservation display H5 is displayed), although the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 11-9, the monochrome effect is performed. Since it is being executed, the execution setting for monochrome effect is not performed (see FIG. 11-16), but the processing of steps 074AKS003 and 074AKS004 in FIG. 11-9 is executed, so the display mode of the pending display changes. It will happen. FIG. 11-22(G) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-22(F) is finished. Also, an example is shown in which the display mode of the pending display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIGS. 11-13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-22(H), each pending display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to the pending display H3 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, while the display form of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display, the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to PT3. Since it changes according to the display mode change pattern of -2-04, the display mode of the pending display H5 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the change effect of the failure mode is performed for the suspension display H4, and the change effect of the success mode is performed for the suspension display H5. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, the player cannot recognize whether each change effect is a success mode or a failure mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23(I), the ready-to-win effect of super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. As indicated by -23(K), each hold display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to hold display H4 is started. Here, the suspension (active display AH) of the suspension display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, so the display mode of the active display AH changes in this variable display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-23(L), a success mode change effect is performed. In addition, FIG. 11-23(L) shows an example in which in the process of step 074AKS023 of FIG. 11-20, the change effect period is set during the reach effect of super reach. On the other hand, the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIGS. 11-13, so the display mode of the hold display H5 does not change in this variable display. In the illustrated example, regarding the hold of the hold display H5, an example is shown in which the change effect is set not to be executed in the processing of step 074AKS024 of FIG. 11-20.

When it comes to the middle of the super reach, it is determined at step 074AKS031 in FIG. 11-21 that it is the end timing of monochrome effect, and as shown in FIG. The game effect lamp 9 is lit, and a success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, if the display mode changes even once during the monochrome effect, a success sound is output. In this case, the success sound may be output once after the failure sound is output twice, so that the player can recognize by hearing how many times the display mode has changed. . According to this, it is possible to inform the player of the timing when the display mode is changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. As shown in FIG. 11-23(M), when the monochrome rendering ends, the display color of the pending display H5 and the display color of the active display AH become visible. After that, the variable display ends. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23(M), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIG. , and the variable display result after that is "big hit". Since the pending display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 11-13, the display mode is "green" in the example shown in FIG. 11-23(M). In addition to the color, the shape may be changed as the change of the display mode. Further, for example, the color of the effect image displayed around the active display and the suspended display may be changed. Furthermore, in addition to changing the shape of the active display and the hold display, the color of the effect image may also be changed. Such a change may be performed during the monochrome effect, or the monochrome effect may be started by performing these changes.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and during execution of the monochrome effect (specific effect state), the number of colors of images including pending display and active display is displayed less than in the normal effect state. In the specific production state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the normal production state, and in the normal production state, by executing the change production, the display color of the pending display and the active display is changed to a color according to the degree of expectation and displayed. Then, in the specific effect state, monochrome output processing is performed to display the display mode of the suspended display and the active display in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation. Then, when the specific effect state shifts to the normal effect state, the monochrome output process is completed, and the display modes of the pending display and the active display are displayed in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the pending display and the active display in the first stage "white" during the specific effect state, regardless of the degree of expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the processing of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120, for example, when the monochrome object image is displayed in two colors, black and white, by monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also two colors, black and white. The number of colors is set to correspond to the number of colors of a monochrome image, such as . According to this, it is possible to emphasize the specific effect state and improve the game interest.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing a monochrome effect (monochrome output process) in the process of step 074AKS056. As a result, monochrome target images, such as pending display, active display, and background image, are displayed in monochrome mode. According to this, it is possible to emphasize the specific effect state and improve the game interest.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 silences the output sound during the specific effect state, outputs only the execution start sound and does not output the success sound or the failure sound for the change effect. According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect state stand out and to recognize the start of execution of the change effect. Then, the success sound or the failure sound is output at the timing when the monochrome effect ends. According to this, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the specific display such as the hold display or the active display has changed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 074AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, the one described in the above embodiment It may have a configuration of parts. Moreover, at least a part of each of the following modified examples may be combined.

In the above-described embodiment, in the specific effect state during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display corresponding to variable display and the background image are in the monochrome mode, but this is just an example. For example, in addition to the display corresponding to the variable display, an image that informs the degree of expectation for the big hit by the color to be displayed, such as the degree of expectation by the color of the displayed character or message, may be in a monochrome mode. According to this, as the production effect of the specific production state, it is possible to make the degree of expectation unrecognizable more suitably, and it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is not an image displayed by lottery on the side of the effect control board 12 (not an image displayed by lottery according to the degree of expectation), but by a command or the like sent from the main board 11 side. An image (special information) for displaying information shall be displayed in a normal mode (for example, full color), not in a monochrome mode. Specifically, it consists only of numbers, for example, odd numbers are displayed in red and even numbers are displayed in blue (displayed in the same color as the decoration pattern), always small patterns that are always visible to the player, special symbols By displaying the number of reservations of 1 and special figure 2 with numbers, the number of reservations that can be specified by the player, and the display of the number of reservations, and the right-handed display, etc., should be controlled so as not to be monochrome in monochrome production. Just do it. In addition, since the right-handed display is displayed in the variable probability state, it may be possible to execute the monochrome effect even in the variable probability state. Furthermore, in the normal effect state, the small symbols, the always reserved number display, the right-handed display, etc. may be displayed in a monochrome mode, and in the specific effect state, they may be displayed in other colors such as red. According to this, it is possible to recognize the content suggested by the special information even in the specific effect state, and prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the specific effect state, the display corresponding to the variable display (specific display) such as the pending display and the active display is displayed in the first stage "white", but the normal effect state It may be displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in , and is displayed only in a specific effect state (for example, it is displayed in gray regardless of the degree of expectation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the suspended display or the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed has been shown, but this is only an example. For example, without executing the process of step 074AKS052 in FIGS. 11-16, a monochrome effect may be executed regardless of whether the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the timing for starting execution of the monochrome effect is the start winning timing (that is, the timing at which the game medium has won a prize), but this is just an example. The execution timing of the monochrome effect may be a predetermined timing during the variable display. The execution timing may be such that the player cannot specify to what stage the color of the frame has changed until the end of the monochrome effect. In other words, as long as the monochrome effect can be executed during the execution of the effect of notifying the degree of expectation of the big hit by the displayed color, the execution timing of the monochrome effect may be any timing.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 75AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 075AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 075AK of this embodiment, unlike the characteristic part 074AK, the monochrome effect ends by changing the display mode (display color) of the specific display such as the pending display and the active display. That is, the change timing is the end timing of the monochrome effect. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 075AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that descriptions of portions similar to those described in the basic description above and portions similar to those described in the characteristic portion 074AK will be omitted.

FIG. 11-25 is a flow chart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing executed by the characterizing portion 075AK. It should be noted that the same numbers as those of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9 are given to the parts that perform the same processing as the pre-reading notice setting process executed in the characteristic portion 074AK. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-25, in step 074AKS003, after determining the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed, the setting process such as monochrome effect is executed ( step 075AKS001). The monochrome effect setting process of step 075AKS001 is a process of determining whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed, the end timing thereof, and the display mode change pattern of the pending display and the active display.

FIG. 11-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the monochrome effect setting process executed in step 075AKS001 of FIG. 11-24. It should be noted that in the illustrated example, the same numbers as in FIG. 11-16 are assigned to portions that perform the same processing as the monochrome effect setting processing in FIG. 11-16. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state, as in the monochrome effect setting process of FIG. 11-16. (Step 074AKS051), if it is off (Step 074AKS051; No), whether or not there is a hold (including active display) whose display mode changes before the current hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice That is, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the pending or active display present in the foreground (the display mode for the foreground) changes (step 074AKS051A). If the monochrome effect flag is ON (step 074AKS051; Yes) or if the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" (step 075AKS012). Whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" may be determined by confirming the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 of FIG. 11-24. If the display mode of the active display is "white" (step 075AKS012; No), that is, if the display mode of the active display does not change from the pending display, the effect control CPU 120, according to the number of pending, PT4-4-01 , PT3-1-01, or PT2-2-01 (not shown), and the monochrome effect setting process is terminated.

If the display mode of the active display is ``blue'', ``green'', or ``red'' other than ``white'' (step 075AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 indicates whether or not the monochrome effect is executed as a variable display result. Accordingly, it is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-17 (step 074AKS053). After executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054).

If the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120, according to the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15, The display mode change pattern is determined according to the display mode of the active display determined in step 074 AKS003 and the number of reserved memories indicated by either the first special figure reserved memory number designation command or the second special figure reserved memory number designation command ( Step 075 (AKS013), the process for setting monochrome effect etc. is terminated.

If the monochrome effect is to be executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 follows the display mode change pattern determination table (for monochrome) shown in FIG. Determine the display mode change pattern according to the display mode of the active display determined in 074AKS003 and the number of reserved memories indicated by either the first special figure reserved memory number designation command or the second special figure reserved memory number designation command (step 075AKS014).

The display mode change pattern determination table (for monochrome) shown in FIG. 11-26(A) is a table that is referred to for determining the change pattern of the display mode of the suspended display and the active display when executing the monochrome effect. . In the characteristic part 075AK, when the monochrome effect is executed, the change pattern is determined such that only the display mode of the active display is changed without changing the display mode of the suspension display. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the pending display is "white", and the display mode of the active display is "blue" to "red" so that the display mode change pattern is determined. Each display mode change pattern is set accordingly.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after determining the display step change pattern in step 075AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing of changing the active display according to the active display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 11-26(B). is determined to be one of the timings A to C according to the display mode of the active display (step 075AKS015).

The "timing A" of the characteristic portion 075AK in this embodiment is the timing before the reach state, that is, the timing immediately before entering the reach state, the "timing B" is the timing at the start of the reach effect of super reach, ” is the timing in the middle of the reach production of super reach. That is, "timing A" timing is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, "timing B" is the next earliest timing, and "timing C" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 11-26, in the characteristic portion 075AK of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with high expectations in the order of "timing C" > "timing B" > "timing A". The determination ratio is set such that the later the timing from the start of the variable display until the change occurs, the higher the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to the display color expected by the player. It is

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after executing the process of step 075AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing immediately after the change timing determined in the process of step 075AKS015 as the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 075AKS016). As a result, the monochrome output process ends at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes, and the active display is displayed in the changed display mode. After executing the process of step 075AKS016, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing the monochrome effect (step 074AKS056), sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and performs the monochrome effect, etc. End the setting process. By performing the processing of step 074AKS056, the execution of the monochrome effect (monochrome output processing) is started, and thereby, the image of the monochrome mode object such as the suspended display, the active display, the background image, etc. The points to be displayed are the same as those of the characteristic portion 074AK. Also, in the specific effect state during monochrome effect execution, the pending display and active display are displayed in the first stage “white” (displayed in a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). , control to mute output sounds such as sound effects and performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome performance, and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. is the same as the characteristic portion 074AK.

Returning to FIG. 11-24, after executing the processing of step 074AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 is, according to the display mode change pattern determined in step 075AKS013 or step 075AKS014 of FIG. 11-25, the first pending display or the second pending display is displayed (step 075AKS002). After executing the process of step 075AKS002, the same process as the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9 is performed (the same process as the feature part 074AK is performed).

FIG. 11-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect setting process performed in the variable display start setting process in the characteristic portion 075AK (see FIG. 11-19). Note that the change effect setting processing performed in the characteristic portion 075AK differs in that the processing of steps 075AKS021 to step 075AKS023 is executed in addition to the change effect setting processing performed in the characteristic portion 074AK, but the other points are the same. do.

When the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-27 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021). When the monochrome effect flag is off (step 075AKS021; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps 074AKS022 to step 074AKS024 in the same manner as the feature part 074AK.

On the other hand, if the monochrome effect flag is set to ON (step 075AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022). ). When the display mode of the active display does not change in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the change effect setting process as it is.

When the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change effect pattern, which is the execution pattern of the change effect, to the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-28. According to (step 075AKS023), after setting according to the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-25, the change effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 11-28 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, when the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. At the start of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, which is the timing, the changing performance of the failure mode is performed, and at the middle of the super-reach, which is the timing, the changing performance of the success mode is performed. If the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. At the start of a ready-to-win performance of a certain super ready-to-win, a variation performance pattern of pattern 2 is set to execute a success mode variation performance. If the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 in FIG. 11-25 is timing C, that is, immediately before the ready-to-reach state, the change effect pattern of pattern 3 in which the change effect of the success mode is executed immediately before the ready-to-reach state, which is timing A. is set.

In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the change effect of the failure mode is executed at the timing when the display mode of the active display does not change, but there may be a pattern in which the change effect is not executed.

FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a monochrome effect and a change effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 11-29(A), a state in which a hold is stored as one of the hold displays H1 and a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is being performed. In , output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 for game effects is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning slot, the pending display H2 is displayed, and the display mode of the active display is determined in the pre-reading advance notice setting process of FIG. 11-24, and the monochrome effect setting process When the monochrome effect is executed at , as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), the background image, the hold display, etc. are displayed in a monochrome mode on the image display device 5, and the effects from the speakers 8L and 8R Control is performed to mute output sounds such as sounds and effect sounds and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for game effects. FIG. 11-29(B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-29(A) is finished. Further, in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display in the pending display H2 is determined to be "red" (step 074AKS003 in FIG. 11-24), and is determined to be the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 (FIG. 11-25 step 075AKS014), and the active display change timing is determined to be timing C (step 075AKS015 in FIG. 11-25). That is, according to the changing effect pattern of pattern 1, the changing effects of the failure mode and the success mode are executed (see FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-29(C), when each pending display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is started, the pending display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-29(D), when the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is completed and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H2 is started, as shown in FIG. 11-29(E) , the pending display H2 is displayed as the active display AH. The example shown in FIG. 11-29(E) shows an example of the timing (timing A) immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 enters the ready state. Since the change effect of failure mode and success mode is executed according to the change effect pattern of pattern 1, in the illustrated example, when the change effect of failure mode is performed at the timing (timing A) immediately before the ready-to-win state. It shows about It should be noted that in the changing effect, although the execution start sound, that is, the effect start sound that notifies the player that the image of the shooting star has been displayed is output, the success sound and the failure sound are not output. is similar to

Then, after reaching the ready-to-win state, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is started (at the timing of timing B), as shown in FIG. When it comes to the timing C in the middle of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (G), a success mode change effect is performed, and this is the end timing of the monochrome effect, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (H). , the monochrome effect is completed, and accordingly, the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is turned on, and a success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 11-29(H), by changing the display mode of the active display, the monochrome rendering ends, and the display color of the active display AH becomes visible. In the example shown in FIG. 11-29(H), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 in FIG. , and the variable display result after that is "big hit".

As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 075AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and during execution of the monochrome effect (specific effect state), the number of colors of images including pending display and active display is displayed less than in the normal effect state. In the specific production state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the normal production state, and in the normal production state, by executing the change production, the display color of the pending display and the active display is changed to a color according to the expectation level. In the specific effect state, the specific effect state is shifted to the normal effect state at the timing immediately after the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, the performance pattern becomes diverse, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a success mode change effect that changes the display mode of the active display and a failure mode change effect that does not change the display mode of the active display. Then, the monochrome effect is terminated at the timing immediately after the change effect of the success mode is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the active display has changed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 starts the monochrome effect by executing the setting process such as the monochrome effect in the pre-reading notice setting process executed at the timing when the pending display is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game medium wins. Then, after the variable display corresponding to the pending display of the target is started and displayed as the active display, the monochrome presentation is terminated at the timing immediately after the success mode change presentation is executed for the active display. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display color of the active display has changed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display at one of the timings A to C. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), the later the change timing is, the more the display mode changes to the active display with a higher degree of expectation. According to this, the effect pattern becomes various and the game interest can be improved.

(Modified example of characteristic part 075AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, the one described in the above embodiment It may have a configuration of parts. Moreover, at least a part of each of the following modified examples may be combined. Furthermore, all or part of the features shown in the modification of the feature portion 074AK may be combined.

In the above embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes in the specific effect state in which the monochrome effect is being executed is determined by the process of step 075AKS015 in FIG. In addition to this, for example, even in the normal effect state, the timing at which the display mode of the pending display and the active display changes is the timing A in FIG. 11-26(B). to timing C may be determined. In this case, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes may be determined to be the timing C more frequently in the specific effect state than in the normal effect state. According to this, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the timing of ending the monochrome effect is immediately after the display mode of the active display changes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the same timing as the timing of the change. In addition, the timing immediately after the change in the display mode of the pending display, or the timing at which the display mode changes, may be set as the end timing of the monochrome effect, not limited to the display mode of the active display. That is, the end timing of the specific effect state may include at least the timing when the change effect is executed and the display mode (display color) of the pending display or the active display changes. It may be the timing immediately after, or the end timing of the changed variable display. In this case, when the number of reserved memories is "3" or more, the monochrome effect can be executed, and the timing after the display mode changes after the reserved display shifts twice is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. Just do it. Specifically, in the setting process for monochrome effects, etc. in FIG. Counts the number of times pending has shifted since execution began. Then, when the count value is "2" or more, it is determined that the end condition of the monochrome effect is satisfied, and the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes thereafter may be determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. According to this, although the condition for ending the monochrome effect is that the display mode changes, it is possible to secure a viewing period for the monochrome effect, and to improve the effect of the effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed has been shown, but this is just an example. Even when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change (that is, when the display mode of the active display does not change, it may be decided to execute the monochrome effect). ). In this case, the monochrome effect may end when the variable display corresponding to the hold that was the target when it was decided to execute the monochrome effect ends.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-30 to 11-44.

FIG. 11-30 is part of a flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. 42) after executing the pending display update process for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending memory display displayed in accordance with the received command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning, any of the processing of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. is set to run. The start winning command buffer 153SG194A corresponds to the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer in the characteristic portion 074AK (see FIG. 11-7). Is the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storage of the first special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") and the variable display A storage area corresponding to the first special figure (an area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0" and corresponding to active display) is provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0” and corresponding to active display) are provided.

FIG. 11-31 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 11-30. In the advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the receive command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning (153SGS241), and determines whether or not there is an entry in which the pending display flag is not set (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS242 has the pending display flag "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the pre-reading notice setting process (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the pattern designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the pattern designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (announcement type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-32(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-32 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, four types of display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pending display previous notice effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. determines the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α, determines the execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β at a rate of 20%, and determines the execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern γ at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and holding display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display forewarning effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-32(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and a pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(A) and 11-32(B), in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α The jackpot type is set to be the jackpot B or the jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for being controlled to the big win gaming state than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the process of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry and prefetched. The advance notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 11-33 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153 SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of matching decorative patterns (big hit pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to 153SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach, suggesting effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (153SGS278). In other words, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect or setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only in the display, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-41, the result of the variable display becomes a big hit as a suggestive effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and suggesting a period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started. , during the ready-to-win performance, which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the result of the variable display will result in a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display, or a setting suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Suggestion production can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) is determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is determined in the processing of 153SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of the character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, execution of the front variable display suggestive effect is not determined unless execution of the rear variable display effect is determined. In variable display of reach and normal reach, no timer effect or character effect is executed as suggestive effect during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 11-41 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-reach effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if execution of the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the rear variable display suggestive effect on the timer (as shown in FIG. 11-41 (B), the value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 seconds 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 that is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 11-34 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-33. 10-34, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A to specify the value of the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, the ratio of 90% determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, the ratio of 10% determines the execution of the big hit suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and the ratio of 0% determines the performance of the rear. Execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, it determines non-execution of the rear variable display suggesting performance at a rate of 50%, determines the execution of the jackpot suggesting performance as the rear variable display suggesting performance at a rate of 50%, and determines the execution of the jackpot suggesting performance at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%, and determines the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of suggestive performance during variable rear display, 30% determines execution of jackpot suggestive performance as suggestive performance during variable rear display, and 70% as suggestive performance during variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the pending display advance notice effect for the variable display, the rear variable display suggesting effect While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggesting effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, it is more important to play the game whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 11-34, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS302 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process of determining the suggestive effect during the variable rear display is terminated. , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute a big hit suggestive effect as a suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the performance pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 11-35(B), three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, the pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and the pattern AS-2 is: This is an effect pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than the pattern AS-1, and the putter AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. This is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the process of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 11-36, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

As shown in FIG. 11-35(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 153SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set to be low, and the setting values 5 and 6 are to be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the process of 153SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 11-37. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the setting value of 6 is determined.

FIG. 11-38 is a flow chart showing a suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-33. 11-38, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestive performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-39(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, at a rate of 5%, execution of a timer effect is determined as a suggestive effect during front variable display.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big hit, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the set suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. An effect to be executed as a suggestive effect during presence/absence and front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-39(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 20% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the forward part is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during variable front display is completed. (153 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Among these production patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of a big win. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

For this reason, in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. , and 80% of the time, pattern CS-2 is determined. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable part display is terminated (153SGS318).

As shown in FIG. 11-39(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided as effect patterns of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS318. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of the variable display results that result in a big win on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started for 25 seconds with the image of the character Y. (See FIGS. 11-40 (C), 11-42 (D) and 11-42 (E)).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33 to 11-41, when it is determined to execute the front variable display suggesting effect during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (A) and 11-41 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic portion 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. It is executed over 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-42 to 11-44. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (A) and 11-42 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect. When the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ is determined, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-42(C) to 11-42(E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the aspect of the camera is started, the front portion A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. An update display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-43(F) to 11-43(H), when the variable display progresses with the timer update display until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big win suggesting performance or a setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (I) In the image display device 5, a message such as "chance!" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low is displayed, and if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 11-43 (J). is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and if the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, as shown in FIG. As indicated by -43(K), the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!".

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the mode of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment is also an effect that prompts the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -39 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed, so that the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big win. The setting suggesting performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggesting performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as the timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (see FIGS. 11-42 (D) and 11-42 (E)). Although a form of notifying more clearly is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display suggests The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be suggested).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect are performed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not executed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-40(B) and 11-40(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 25 seconds and a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggesting performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggesting effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-41, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the super ready-to-win variable display. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the second half of the variable display of super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

11-31 and 11-35, the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment changes the display mode of the pending memory display as a pre-reading notice to a white square or star, or a blue or red camera. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the blue or red camera, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 and 11-44, when the pending display notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. The setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the end of the pending display notice effect) corresponding to the hold storage display that is the target of the hold display notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-32, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set to the state where the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading advance notice effect, or the pending memory display as a blue or red camera color as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

It should be noted that, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the speaker 8L, 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display forewarning effect. It is executable, and as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), when the pending memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode (when the value of the pending display flag is 3) and when the pending memory display is red The ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case of display in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, a case is provided in which the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display changes from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach fluctuation pattern with the long special figure fluctuation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-41, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure variation time of the shortened non-reach variation pattern, so during variable display of super reach (reach effect (during execution), it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-32, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that it is a variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-32, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, pending display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 to 11-41, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with a short fluctuation time, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

(Modified example of characteristic portion 153SG)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue 11-46 (A) and 11-46 (A) and As shown in FIG. 11-46(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 153SG005E (the blue or red camera The reserved memory display in the form of (1) may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera due to the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera being blocked by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is given of a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 11-47(A) and 11-47(B), as a modified example 153SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds (shorter than 5.75 seconds)) may be executed setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 153SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode. The decision ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in the case of displaying in the form of the red camera and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach. Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be executed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as the pending display forewarning effect are shown. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the reserved memory display. Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which setting suggestive effects can be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effects during the variable display in which the timer effects as the suggestive effects during the front variable display are executed. , the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggesting effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in this invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect is already executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Further, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the holding display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if it is an effect that can be executed from the timing before the target variable display starts.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, any effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration related to the characteristic portion 074AK, the configuration related to the characteristic portion 075AK, and the configuration related to the characteristic portion 153SG may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions. For example, in the characteristic part 074AK or the characteristic part 075AK, when the display mode changes to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit due to the change effect during the monochrome effect, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is set to be high like the characteristic part 153SG. good too. According to this, since the setting suggesting effect is executed while the player is paying attention to the subsequent development by executing the effect in which the ratio of being controlled to be in a relatively advantageous state is high, the setting suggestion effect by the player is executed. It is possible to prevent overlooking of the suggestive production.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10... General winning port 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Sound control board 14... LED control board 15... Relay board 17... Special variable winning ball device 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting Mouth switch 23... First count switch 24... Second count switch 30... Ball-hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Pass gate 100... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a decision means capable of deciding to control to said advantageous state;
a determination means capable of determining that the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the determination means;
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display related to the variable display on the display means;
a change effect executing means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display;
The display color of the specific display varies depending on the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
There are a normal performance state and a specific performance state, which is a performance state that can be shifted from the normal performance state, in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal performance state,
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of display objects including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state,
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the specific effect state, the display color of the specific display is set to a similar color regardless of the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state. display and
displaying the display color of the specific display in a display color corresponding to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the specific display state is shifted to the normal display state;
The determining means determines transition from the normal rendering state to the specific rendering state for variable displays that have not yet started,
When the variable display that can be executed before the variable display determined by the determination means to shift from the normal effect state to the specific effect state is executed, the normal effect state is changed to the specific effect state. limited migration of
Regarding the number of colors of special information that does not suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, it is not displayed less even in the specific effect state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images